Sie sind auf Seite 1von 202

All rights reserved.

Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

ALCATEL-LUCENT
WIRELESS TRANSMISSION DIVISION

01 07-10-09
ED

DATE

CHANGE NOTE

G.Boiocchi

C.Pasqualini

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

ULS 2.1 (v.2.1.2)


System Specification
SNMP Management Interface
ED
WTD

01 It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

1/207

INDEX...................................................................................................................................................................................2
PREFACE.............................................................................................................................................................................6
1

INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................................7
1.1
1.2
1.3

OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................................................9
2.1
2.2

ABBREVIATIONS ....................................................................................................................................................7
GLOSSARY .............................................................................................................................................................8
SCOPE ....................................................................................................................................................................8

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................................................9


CONFIGURATIONS ..................................................................................................................................................9

EQUIPMENT DOMAIN ..........................................................................................................................................10


3.1
OVERVIEW ...........................................................................................................................................................10
3.2
ALLOWED EQUIPMENT TYPES .............................................................................................................................11
3.2.1 Shelves Equipment Types................................................................................................................................11
3.2.2 Slots and Sub-slots Equipment Types .............................................................................................................13
3.3
REMOTE INVENTORY MANAGEMENT ...................................................................................................................14
3.4
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION SWITCHING MANAGEMENT .........................................................................................14
3.5
EXTERNAL POINTS MANAGEMENT ......................................................................................................................15
3.6
MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS..................................................................................................................................16
3.6.1 Functional Objects Creation ..........................................................................................................................31
3.7
SUPPORTED OBJECTS AND NAMING RULES .........................................................................................................32

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

INDEX

TRANSMISSION INTERFACES (IFTABLE).......................................................................................................35


4.1
MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS..................................................................................................................................35
4.2
SNMP TABLES ....................................................................................................................................................36
4.2.1 Supported objects ...........................................................................................................................................36
4.3
NAMING RULES ...................................................................................................................................................36

SDH/PDH TRANSMISSION DOMAIN..................................................................................................................38


5.1
5.2
5.3

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................38


MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS..................................................................................................................................42
SUPPORTED OBJECTS AND NAMING RULES .........................................................................................................58

ETHERNET TRANSMISSION DOMAIN .............................................................................................................60


6.1
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................60
6.2
MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS..................................................................................................................................65
6.2.1 Ethernet Physical Interface Management.......................................................................................................65
6.2.2 Ethernet Port Management ............................................................................................................................75
6.2.3 Ethernet Transport Service Management.......................................................................................................79
6.3
SUPPORTED OBJECTS AND NAMING RULES .........................................................................................................81
RADIO DOMAIN......................................................................................................................................................83
7.1
7.2
7.3

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................83


MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS..................................................................................................................................87
SUPPORTED OBJECTS AND NAMING RULES .......................................................................................................114

SUPPORT DOMAIN ..............................................................................................................................................117


8.1
8.2
8.3

ED
WTD

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ...............................................................................................................................117


MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS................................................................................................................................124
SUPPORTED OBJECTS AND NAMING RULES .......................................................................................................141

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

2/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING DOMAIN...............................................................................................147


9.1
9.2
9.3

10

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................................147
MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................................149
SUPPORTED OBJECTS AND NAMING RULES .......................................................................................................156
OVERHEAD DOMAIN......................................................................................................................................158

10.1
10.2
10.3
11

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................................158
MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................................158
SUPPORTED OBJECTS AND NAMING RULES .......................................................................................................161
TEST DOMAIN...................................................................................................................................................162

11.1
11.2
11.3
12

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................................162
MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................................163
SUPPORTED OBJECTS AND NAMING RULES .......................................................................................................164
SDH/PDH PERFORMANCE MONITORING DOMAIN ..............................................................................167

12.1
12.2
12.3
13

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................................167
MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................................168
SUPPORTED OBJECTS AND NAMING RULES .......................................................................................................175
ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MONITORING DOMAIN ..........................................................................178

13.1
13.2
13.3
14

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................................178
MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................................179
SUPPORTED OBJECTS AND NAMING RULES .......................................................................................................181
SECURITY DOMAIN ........................................................................................................................................182

14.1
14.2
14.3
15

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (SNMP INTERFACE)...............................................................................................182


MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................................185
SUPPORTED OBJECTS AND NAMING RULES .......................................................................................................187
ALARMS .............................................................................................................................................................189

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

15.1
ALARMS PROVIDED BY ITEM HW......................................................................................................................189
15.2
ALARMS REPORTED ...........................................................................................................................................194
15.2.1
Equipment Alarms....................................................................................................................................194
15.2.2
Communication Alarms............................................................................................................................196
15.3
PREDEFINED ASAPS SEVERITY .........................................................................................................................198

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

3/202

Date
Edition
071009 Ed. 01 It. 1

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

HISTORY
Comments
Creation.
The main features of this version (2.1.2) are the following:
ODU v1/v2 full compatibility (AWY 2.0.6 like);
NAT static (AWY 2.0.6 like);
1+1 option MUX EPS protection (RPS only);
Automatic Link Shutdown on Ethernet ports;
Time Slot management in E1#1 tributary frame.
The SNMP Optics-IM reference version for this release is the
v4.04.
The features implemented in this document release are referred to [5].

REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
[1] RFC 2495 Definitions of Managed Objects for the DS1, E1, DS2 and E2 Interface Types
[2] HW & SW Specification 9400 AWY New Generation PDH Radio Family
HSS/S056 8BW 03219 0000 DSCWA Ed.02, 2003.07.28
[3] HW & SW Specification 9400AWY Restyling New Generation PDH Radio Family (IDU, ODU
7&8GHz)
HSS/S056 8BW 03538 0000 DSZZA Ed.01 2004.06.15 Released
[4] HW & SW Specification 9400AWY Rel.2.1
HSS 3DB 16001 AAAA DSZZA Ed.01, 2005.06.15
[5] PDH Microwaves family 9400AWY R2.1 Network Element Road Map
3DB xxxxx AAAA FLZZA Ed.08, 2007.08.03
[6] 9400 AWY 2.1 (v.2.1.2) System Requirements Specification
3DB 16172 AAAA DSZZA Ed.01 It.01, 2007.10.05
RELATED DOCUMENTS
[7] Optics-IM: Communication and Routing Domain (SNMP)
3AL 38806 0000 DSZZA
[8] Optics-IM: Support Domain (SNMP)
3AL 38806 0005 DSZZA

[10] Optics-IM: SDH/PDH Transmission Domain (SNMP)


3AL 38806 0014 DSZZA

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

4/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

[9] Optics-IM: Equipment Domain (SNMP)


3AL 38806 0013 DSZZA

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

[11] Optics-IM: SDH/PDH Performance Monitoring Domain (SNMP)


3AL 38806 0012 DSZZA
[12] Optics-IM: Radio Domain (SNMP)
3AL 38806 0015 DSZZA
[13] Optics-IM: Test Domain (SNMP)
3AL 38806 0017 DSZZA
[14] Optics-IM: Overhead Domain (SNMP)
3AL 38806 0018 DSZZA
[15] Optics-IM: Security Domain (SNMP)
3AL 38806 0004 DSZZA

[16] Optics-IM: List of SNMP Events


3AL 38897 0001 DSZZA

[17] Optics-IM: Operator Labels and Naming Rules (SNMP)


3AL 38806 0006 DSZZA

[18] Ethernet Physical Interface Management


3AL 81428 0012 DSZZA

[19] SNMP Management Functions


Annex to Ethernet Physical Interface Management
3AL 81428 0012 DSZZA

[20] Ethernet Port Management


3AL 81428 0016 DSZZA

[21] SNMP Management Functions


Annex to Ethernet Port Management Functional Specification
3AL 81428 0016 DSZZA

[22] Ethernet Performance Monitoring


3AL 81428 0014 DSZZA

[23] SNMP Management Functions


Annex to Ethernet Performance Monitoring Functional Specification

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

3AL 81428 0014 DSZZA

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

5/202

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

6/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

This document provides the functional description of SNMP management interface of ULS 2.1 (Urban
Link Split mount) Radio NE in the scope of Release 2.1.2.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

PREFACE

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

INTRODUCTION

1.1 Abbreviations

AIS
ANSI
APT
ASAP
ATPC
AVC
BER
BBE
CD
CLA
EC
EFC
EFD
EOW
EPS
ES
ETH
ETSI
EW
FCS
FD
FE
GFP
HBER
HD
HET
HS
HSB
IDU
IM
IP
LAN
LAPD
LBER
LOF
LOS
MAC
MAU
MIB
MTU
NE
NMS
NSA
NTP
OC
ODU
OFS
ED

NTIAL
WTD

Alarm Indication Signal


American National Standards Institute
Active Problem Table
Alarm Severity Assignment Profile
Automatic Transmit Power Control
Attribute Value Change
Bit Error Ratio
Background Block Error
Current Data
Common Loss Alarm
Equipment Controller
Ethernet Flow Control
Event Forwarding Discriminator
Engineering Order Wire
Equipment Protection Switching
Errored Second
ETHernet
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
Early Warning
Frame Check Sequence
Frequency Diversity
Fast Ethernet
Generic Frame Protocol
High Bit Error Ratio
History Data
Hetero frequency
Hitless Switch
Hot Stand-by
InDoor Unit
Information Model
Internet Protocol
Local Area Network
Link Access Procedure on D-channel
Low Bit Error Ratio
Loss Of Frame
Loss Of Signal
Medium Access Control
Medium Attachment Unit
Management Information Base
Maximum Transfer Unit
Network Element
Network Management system
Not Service Affecting
Network Time Protocol
ODU Controller
OutDoor Unit
Out of Frame Second
01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

7/202

OH
OS
PDH
PM
PPI
PSU
QoS
RACS
RAI
RDI
RI
RPS
RPPI
SA
SD
SDH
SES
TCA
TD
TDF
TPS
TRCF
TRCO
TRSEF
TS
TTF
TTO
TTP
UAS
UAT
ULS
URU

OverHead
Operation System
Plesyochronous Digital Hierarchy
Performance Monitoring
Plesyochronous Physical Interface
Power Supply Unit
Quality of Service
Received Automatic Control Status
Remote Alarm Indication
Remote Defect Indication
Remote Inventory
Radio Protection Switching
Radio Plesyochronous Physical Interface
Service Affecting
Space Diversity
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Severely Errored Second
Threshold Crossing Alarm
Threshold Data
Total Discarded Frames
Tx Protection Switching
Total Received Correct Frames
Total Received Correct Octets
Total Received Service Errored Frames
Time Slot
Total Transmitted Frames
Total Transmitted Octets
Trail Termination Point
UnAvailable Second
UnAvailable Time
Urban Low capacity Split
Underling Resource Unavailable

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1.2 Glossary
The following convention is used in the support table of the management functions:
Y the function is supported
N the function is NOT supported
P the function is Partially supported

1.3 Scope

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

8/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

The management functionalities described in this document cover the functionalities of ULS NE
supported at SNMP interface in the scope of Rel. 2.1.2.
The SNMP Optics-IM reference version for release 2.1.2 is the v4.04.
This specification relies on existing domain documentation (see Related Documents). The detailed
description of management functions and management information is provided in these documents.
The present specification refers to this generic specification and focuses on their application to ULS
NE.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

OVERVIEW

ULS NE has the aim to multiplexer/demultiplexer the main tributaries (up to 32 E1/DS1 (DS1 tributary
is not supported) or 1 E3/DS3 (not supported)) with different modulation formats.
The following table resumes the relation between tributaries and modulations.
Allowed
Equipment
Type

Market

Tributary

ODU v1
4/16
QAM
32 Mb

ETSI

ODU-E

2xE1
4xE1
8xE1
16xE1
32xE1

4 QAM
4 QAM
4 QAM
4 QAM
-

64 Mb
16 QAM
16 QAM
16 QAM
16 QAM

ODU v2
4 QAM

ODU v2
4/16
QAM

32 Mb

64 Mb

4 QAM
4 QAM
4 QAM
4 QAM
-

4 QAM
4 QAM
4/16 QAM
4/16 QAM
16 QAM

Table: Tributaries and modulations forecasted.

2.1 Functional Description


The main functions performed by IDU and ODU of ULS equipment are the following:

Multiplexer/Demultiplexer
The multiplexer function receives main tributaries (see Table 1) and generates a PDH frame.
The demultiplexer function receives a PDH frame and generates main tributaries.
Signal Protection switch (if any)
The function provides one protection channel for the main signal against channel-associated
failures for both hardware failures and temporary signals degradation or losses due to
propagation effects (e.g. rain) according to equipment configuration.

Radio Physical Interface (AWY)


The function converts a radio frequency signal into an internal logic level signal, and vice versa
(RPPI). Specifically, the following functions are performed:
Modulation and Tx functions in the transmit side
Demodulation and Rx functions in the receive side

2.2 Configurations
ULS NE can be composed by:

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

one radio channel (1+0 configurations);


two radio channels (1+1 configurations).

The 2+0 and N+1 configurations are not supported.


The complete list of the configurations supported in this release is provided in the Support domain.
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

9/202

EQUIPMENT DOMAIN

The NE configuration is described in the Support Domain section.

3.1 Overview
The ULS NE is composed by two different parts: the indoor and the outdoor part. In the following they
are described from physical and management point of view.
Indooor Part (IDU)
The indoor part is composed by two units/shelves (see Figure 1 and 2): Main and Extension units.

Main Unit Ch#1

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Figure 1. Main IDU unit

Extension Unit Ch#0

Figure 2. Extension IDU unit


The Main IDU Unit provides the external interfaces for the E1/E3/DS1/DS3 tributaries (E3/DS1/DS3
tributaries are not allowed in this release), user service channel, housekeeping and summarizing
alarms, audio channels, NMS V11 and G703 interfaces and a telephone jack. It contains the JBIDUM
and the Power Supply units. The JBIDUM unit manages 16E1/DS1 tributaries, the Mux/Demux, the
EPS protection (with the possibility to lock out this protection), the EC/RC interface, the IDU-ODU cable
interface functions and the NMS-V11 + NMS-G703. With the additional plug-in, up to 32E1/DS1
tributaries can be managed. Optional 16xE1/DS1 or E3/DS3 (not allowed in this release) or Data unit
implementing Ethernet interfaces (alternative between them) and one audio channels (+ Service
Channel) can be plugged onto this Main unit.

Outdoor Part (ODU)


According to the configuration type, one or two electrical ODU are managed in the Outdoor part.
Each ODU contains a PQECRC unit. It implements the ODU controller functions.

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

10/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

The Main IDU unit is used both in 1+0 and 1+1 configurations.
The Extension IDU Unit contains the JBIDUE (it contains Mux/Demux, the EPS and RPS protections
(with Hitless Switch) and IDU-ODU cable interface functions) and the Power Supply. Optional
16xE1/DS1 or E3/DS3 unit (alternative between them, but in this release, E3/DS3 is not supported)
can be plugged onto this Extension IDU unit.
The Extension IDU unit is used only in 1+1 configurations.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

3.2 Allowed Equipment Types


This section provides information on the allowed equipment types for all the configurations supported
by ULS NE.
As effect of the definition of the NE configuration, the agent has to create not only all the structured
equipment describing the related physical layout, but also all the contained equipment (slot and subslots) with the related equipmentExpected value, providing in this way the whole physical description of
the NE configuration defined.
As consequence, the value of the equipmentExpected object is never settable by the managers.
In the following tables, the list of allowed equipment types for each physical position, includes the
whole set of possible types, but, according to the NE configuration defined by the managers, only one
value will be present in opticsIMAllowedEquipmentTypesTable for each physical position.
N.B. Both IDU and ODU shelves are numbered inside a virtual rack (equipmentPosition = 1). All the
IDUs, ODUs and contained positions will be numbered accordingly.
3.2.1 Shelves Equipment Types
The following table provides the shelves equipment types allowed for each supported NE configuration
(see support domain section for the list of supported configurations).
The shelves are numbered according to the following sequence rule:
IDU
Ch#1
ODU Ch#1
IDU
Ch#0
ODU Ch#0
NE
Configurati
on

Positio
n
1.1.0.0

1+0
1+0 ETH
(note 1)

1.2.0.0

1.1.0.0

1.2.0.0
1+1
(note 2)

1.3.0.0

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

1.4.0.0

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

Allowed
Allowed Equipment Type
Equipment
Description
Type
IDU Main Shelf
IDU32-M
ODU v1 1+0 4/16 QAM
32Mb
ODU v1 1+0 4/16 QAM
ODU-E
64Mb
(note 3)
ODU v2 1+0 4 QAM
ODU v2 1+0 4/16 QAM
IDU Main Shelf
IDU32-M
ODU v1 1+0 4/16 QAM
32Mb
ODU v1 1+0 4/16 QAM
ODU-E
64Mb
(note 3)
ODU v2 1+0 4 QAM
ODU v2 1+0 4/16 QAM
IDU Extension Shelf
IDU32-E
ODU v1 1+0 4/16 QAM
32Mb
ODU v1 1+0 4/16 QAM
ODU-E
64Mb
(note 3)
ODU v2 1+0 4 QAM
ODU v2 1+0 4/16 QAM

Equipmen
t
Label
IDU Ch#1

ODU
Ch#1

IDU Ch#1

ODU
Ch#1

IDU Ch#0

ODU
Ch#0

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

11/202

(note 2)

All the 1+1 configurations.

(note 3)
The Equipment Type ODU-E is compliant for ODU v1 32Mb (mnemonic ODU-E of
Remote Inventory), for ODU v1 64Mb (mnemonic ODU32-E of Remote Inventory), for ODU v2
4QAM (mnemonic ODU2-E of Remote Inventory) and for ODU v2 4/16QAM (mnemonic ODU232E of Remote Inventory) provided.
No equipment mismatch alarm is raised when the equipmentExpected is set to ODU-E and the
equipmemt type read from Remote Inventory is one of the following: ODU-E, ODU32-E, ODU2-E,
ODU2-32E.

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

12/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

All the 1+0 configurations.

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

(note 1)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

3.2.2 Slots and Sub-slots Equipment Types


The following tables indicate the allowed equipment types for each slot inside each shelf type.
IDU
IDU32-M
Position

Allowed Equipment Type


Description

Allowed
Equipment
Type

Equipment Label

1.1.1.0

Main Unit 48/60 V Range Supply

M4860-32

IDU/MAIN Ch#1

Main Unit 24/60 V Range Supply

M2460-32

16xE1/DS1 plug-in unit

P16E1DS1

4xGigabit Ethernet plug-in unit

P4DATASW

Audio channels+ Service Channel


(64Kb/s) plug-in unit

P-AC-SC

1.1.1.1

1.1.1.2

IDU/MAIN/<note 1>
Ch#1
IDU/MAIN/<note 2>
Ch#1

Table: Allowed board/plug-in types in IDU Main shelf


(note 1)

(note 2)

The label is one of the following:


E1, when the 16xE1/DS1 plug-in is provisioned and it configured to work in E1 mode
DATA, when the 4xDATA plug-ins are provisioned.

The label is the following:


AC-SC, when the audio channels+Service Channel plug-in is provisioned.
IDU32-E

Positio
n

Allowed Equipment Type


Description

Allowed
Equipmen
t Type

Equipment Label

1.3.1.0

Extension Unit 48/60 V Range Supply

E4860-32

IDU/EXT Ch#0

Extension Unit 24/60 V Range Supply

E2460-32

16xE1/DS1 plug-in unit (note 1)

P16E1DS1

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

1.3.1.1

IDU/EXT/<note 2>
Ch#0

Table: Allowed board/plug-in types in IDU Extension shelf


(note 1)
This plug-in is present in all 1+1 configurations, except in whithout EPS MUX
protection configurations.
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

13/202

The label is the following:


E1, when the 16xE1/DS1 plug-in is provisioned and it configured to work in E1 mode

ODU
No slot can be defined inside the Electrical ODU.

3.3 Remote Inventory Management


The Remote Inventory feature allows to store the information useful to identify the components of the
product.
From management point of view the Remote Inventory data will be provided by the following
equipment types:

Main Unit

(M4860-32, M2460-32)

Extension Unit

(E4860-32, E2460-32)

Gigabit Ethernet plug-in

(P4DATASW)

PDH Tributary optional plugs-in

(P16E1DS1)

Audio channels, Service Channel plug-in

(P-AC-SC)

ODU unit

(ODU-E, ODU32-E, ODU2-E, ODU2-32E)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

(note 2)

For all the other equipment types the remoteInventoryStatus columnar object assumes the value
unavailable.
The RI data of each sub-components unit (i.e., JBIDUM in the IDU, MILOU in the ODU) wont be seen
at SNMP management interface but only by means of factory tools.
Also the information about the equipment type can be read from the remote inventory data (Unit
mnemonic field). All the units must be provided in its own remote inventory data this type of
information. It is used to identify the actual equipment type and then, eventually, to provide an
equipment mismatch alarm, if the equipment type read from remote inventory data is different from
the equipment expected provided by the managers.
If it isnt possible to read the Remote Inventory information, a Card Fail alarm is declared.

3.4 Equipment Protection Switching Management


Just one EPS protection scheme is supported. It provides protection both of the PDH multiplexer and of
the demultiplexer functional blocks.
The following table defines the characteristics of this protection scheme.

ED
WTD

01

It.01

Value

1+1
Single ended
Revertive/Non Revertive

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

14/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Parameter Type

Protection group type


Switching type
Restoration criteria

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Switching condition
Operator commands

Equipment failures
Lockout spare (note 1)
Forced switch from main to spare
Manual switch from main to spare and vice-versa

The configuration of this protection scheme is performed by the NE in conjunction with the equipment
provisioning process (declaration of boards).
(note 1) The Lockout spare command disables all RPS protection scheme functionality. In this case the
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupOperationalState object of opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupEntry has to
be set to disabled value. The Ch#1 will be the channel active both for EPS and RPS protection
schemes.

3.5 External Points Management


ULS NE has the capability to monitor 6 input contacts (housekeeping alarms) and 4 output contacts
(housekeeping controls).
The polarity of each external point can be configured through the SNMP management interface.
External output points can be automatically controlled by the agent or manually used by the operator.
In the first case the event that controls the output state is assigned by the operator. The allowed events
are defined in the following table (outputPointAllowedEventId and outputPointAllowedEvent columnar
objects):
Allow
ed
EventI
d
1
2
3

Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Service Affecting Alarm

Line side LOS Alarm

5
6
7

Cable Loss IDU Alarm


Radio Signal Fail Alarm
Local Defect Indication
Remote NE Failure
Indication

Allowed
Event

Allowed Event
description
OR of critical and mayor alarms
OR of minor and warning alarms
OR of service affecting alarms
OR of PDH tributaries and Ethernet interfaces LOS
alarms
OR of cable loss IDU alarms
OR of radio signal fail and HBER alarms
see [3] for the primitives
see [3] for the primitives

Also
the
summarizing
alarms
are
managed
via
SNMP
interface
using
the
opticsIMOutputExternalPointTable. They are managed according to the rules described in the
following table:
Inde
x
Valu
e

Configura
tion

UserLabel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Read-only
5

All the 1+0


All the 1+1

6
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

External
State
Readonly
on/
off

Polarity
Read-write
activeLow/
activeHigh

Criteria
Readonly
automati
c

Automatic
Event

Automatic
EventId

Read-only

Read-only

Fail IDU
Fail ODU
Ch#1

-1

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

15/202

Fail ODU
Ch#0

3.6 Management Functions


The following table lists the Equipment management functions supported in this release (see [9]).

Equipment
Function
Equipment SN Function Description
Configuration
M
P
If
F-2.1 Request Allowed
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Equipment Types
request the allowed equipment types for each equipment
identified by the associated equipment position. The
information available are:
list of allowed rack types (if the equipment is a rack)
list of allowed shelves types (if the equipment is a subrack
(shelf))
list of allowed board types (if the equipment is a slot)
list of allowed module types (if the equipment is a subslot)
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMAllowedEquipmentTypesTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
allowedEquipmentTypeIndex
allowedEquipmentType
F-2.2 Condition
N This management function allows a managing system to
Equipment Expected
configure the equipment type expected for an equipment
position. This equipment type is defined setting the identifier
(equipmentExpectedTypeId
object)
associated
to
the
equipment type string required (equipmentExpected object). As
a side effect of this operation the agent must set the
equipmentExpected object with the equipment type string
associated to this identifier.
The identifier provided must be included in the list of the
equipment types identifiers allowed for that equipment
position (allowedEquipmentTypeIndex object).
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on equipmentExpectedTypeId
F-2.3 Request
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Equipment Expected
request the equipment type expected for an equipment
position. This information is provided by means of equipment
type identifier and associated string.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentTable

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

16/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

All the 1+1

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
equipmentExpectedTypeId
equipmentExpected
F-2.4 Request
Y This management function allows a managing system to
request the equipment type of the equipment physically
Equipment Actual
present.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on equipmentActual
F-2.5 Condition
N This management function allows a managing system to
Administrative State
suspend/resume the use of an equipment. It applies to
equipment objects representing slots/boards and subslots/daughter boards.
Putting an equipment in the outOfService state has the effect
that the functional objects supported by the board are
released from any service. Instead, putting an equipment in
the inService state has the effect that the functional objects
supported by the board are put into service.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on equipmentAdministrativeState
F-2.6 Request
Y This management function allows a managing system to
request whether the equipment is in or out of service.
Administrative State
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on equipmentAdministrativeState
Note F-2.6: Default value: inService.
F-2.7 Condition ASAP
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Pointer
configure the ASAP Pointer associated to an equipment
position.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on equipmentAsapIndex
F-2.8 Request ASAP
Y This management function allows a managing system to
request the ASAP Pointer associated to an equipment position.
Pointer
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on equipmentAsapIndex
F-2.9 Request
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Equipment Label
request the label associated to an equipment position.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on equipmentLabel
F-2.10 Request Affected
N This management function allows a managing system to
Objects List
request the functional objects which are in operational
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

17/202

Equipment SN
M
PIf
F-2.11 Request
Y
Equipment Operational
State

Function Description
This management function allows the managing system to
request the operational state of an equipment.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on equipmentOperationalState

Function
Notifications

Equipment SN Function Description


MP
If
F-2.12 Report
Y This management function allows a managed system to report
Equipment Alarm
equipment alarms.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentTable
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP on:
opticsIMAlarmReplaceableUnitProblemRaise
opticsIMAlarmReplaceableUnitProblemClear
opticsIMAlarmReplaceableUnitMissingRaise
opticsIMAlarmReplaceableUnitMissingClear
opticsIMAlarmReplaceableUnitTypeMismatchRaise
opticsIMAlarmReplaceableUnitTypeMismatchClear
opticsIMAlarmUnconfiguredEquipmentPresentRaise
opticsIMAlarmUnconfiguredEquipmentPresentClear
opticsIMAlarmFirmwareDownloadOnGoingRaise
opticsIMAlarmFirmwareDownloadOnGoingClear
opticsIMAlarmVersionMismatchRaise
opticsIMAlarmVersionMismatchClear
opticsIMAlarmInternalCommunicationProblemRaise
opticsIMAlarmInternalCommunicationProblemClear
opticsIMAlarmLanFailureRaise
opticsIMAlarmLanFailureClear
opticsIMAlarmBatteryFailRaise
opticsIMAlarmBatteryFailClear
opticsIMAlarmAndBatteryFailureRaise
opticsIMAlarmAndBatteryFailureClear
opticsIMAlarmBackplaneFailureRaise
opticsIMAlarmBackplaneFailureClear
opticsIMAlarmReceiverFailureRaise
opticsIMAlarmReceiverFailureClear
ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

18/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function
Status

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

dependency with an equipment.


Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMAffectedObjectListTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on affectedObjectInstanceId

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function
Inventory

Remote SN Function Description


MP
If
F-2.13 Request Remote
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Inventory Data
request the remote inventory data associated to an
equipment.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMRemoteInventoryTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
remoteInventoryStatus
remoteInventoryCompanyIdentifier
remoteInventoryMnemonic
remoteInventoryCLEICode
remoteInventoryPartNumber
remoteInventorySoftwarePartNumber
remoteInventoryFactoryIdentifier
remoteInventorySerialNumber
remoteInventoryDateIndentifier
remoteInventoryDate
remoteInventoryCustomerField
Function Tributary Ports SN
Impedance
MP
If
F-2.14 Condition E1
Y
Tributary Ports
Impedance

F-2.15 Request E1
Tributary Ports
Impedance
1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

opticsIMAlarmLowPowerRaise
opticsIMAlarmLowPowerClear
opticsIMAlarmStandByVersionMismatchRaise
opticsIMAlarmStandByVersionMismatchClear
opticsIMAlarmRemoteInventoryFailureRaise
opticsIMAlarmRemoteInventoryFailureClear
opticsIMAlarmRepeaterCableProblemRaise
opticsIMAlarmRepeaterCableProblemClear
opticsIMAlarmProvisioningMismatchRaise
opticsIMAlarmProvisioningMismatchClear

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

Function Description
This management function allows a managing system to
configure the impedance used by E1 tributary ports (balanced
120 Ohm or unbalanced 75 Ohm).
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMTribPortsImpedance
This management function allows a managing system to
request the impedance used by E1 tributary ports (balanced
120 Ohm or unbalanced 75 Ohm).
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMTribPortsImpedance
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

19/202

F-3.1 Create Equipment


Protection Group

F-3.2 Delete Equipment


Protection Group

Function Configuration
F-3.3 Request
Equipment Protection
Group Type

F-3.4 Condition
Equipment Automatic
Restoration Criteria

ED
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
MP
If
N This management function allows a managing system to
allocate an equipment protection group entry. The managing
system has to indicate in the creation request:
the protection type (1+1 or 1:N)
the mode of operation (revertive/non revertive)
The protection units to be created and their role are
established by the NE and cannot be assigned by the
managing system.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB:
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupRowStatus
object to createAndGo value
N This management function allows a managing system to
delete an equipment protection group entry and related
protection units.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB:
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupRowStatus
object to destroy value
SN Function Description
MP
If
Y This management function allows a managing system to
request the type of protection (1+1 or 1:N).
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB:
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupType
Y This management function allows managing system to control
the automatic restoration criteria from the spare (protecting)
equipment to the main (protected) one when the failure clears.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB:
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupRevertive

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

20/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function
Creation/Deletion

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Equipment Protection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-3.5 Request
Equipment Automatic
Restoration Criteria

F-3.6 Request
Equipment Protection
Unit Type

F-3.7 Request Radio


Channel Number

Function
Commands

Operator SN
MP
If
F-3.9 Allow/Inhibit
N
Switch of a Working
Equipment

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-3.10 Allow/Inhibit
Switch of Protection
Equipment

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

This management function allows a managing system to


request the current automatic restoration criteria: restoration
allowed (revertive mode) or inhibited (non-revertive mode).
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB:
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupRevertive
This management function allows a managing system to
request the type of an equipment protection unit: main
(protected) or spare (protecting).
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitType
This management function allows a managing system to
request the radio channel number (if any) associated to an
equipment protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET
on
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitChannelNumber
Function Description
This management function allows the managing system to
inhibit/allow a working equipment (main) to be switched to a
protection equipment (spare). If the main equipment was
already switched when the Inhibit Switch is requested, it is
forced back to the working position.
This function involves the lockout syntax to inhibit the switch,
the noRequest syntax is used to remove the lockout and allow
the switch, both addressed to a main (working) protection
unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitTable
(on main protection unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchCommand (lockout or
noRequest)
This management function allows the managing system to
inhibit/allow a protection equipment (spare) to provide
protection in the protection scheme. If the protection
equipment was already providing protection for a working
one when the Inhibit Switch is requested, then a forced switch
is performed back to the working position.
This function involves the lockout syntax to inhibit the switch,
the noRequest syntax to remove the lockout and allow the
switch, both addressed to the spare protection unit.
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

21/202

F-3.12
Initiate/Terminate
Manual Switch to a
Working Equipment

F-3.13
Initiate/Terminate
Forced Switch to
Protection Equipment

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

22/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-3.11
Initiate/Terminate
Manual Switch to
Protection Equipment

Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitTable
(on spare protection unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchCommand (lockout or
noRequest)
This management function allows the managing system to
initiate/terminate a manual switch from a working equipment
to a protection one. This command will fail if another working
equipment has already been switched when to the protection
equipment (only in case of 1:N) or if the protection equipment
has a failure condition.
This function involves the manualSwitch syntax to initiate the
switch, the noRequest syntax to terminate the manual switch,
both addressed to a main protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitTable
(on main protection unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
(manualSwitch or noRequest)
This management function allows the managing system to
initiate/terminate a manual switch from a protection
equipment (spare) to a working one (main). This management
function is applicable only in case of 1+1 not revertive
protection type. This command will fail if the working
equipment has a failure condition.
This function involves the manualSwitch syntax to initiate the
switch, the noRequest syntax to terminate the manual switch,
both addressed to the spare protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitTable
(on spare protection unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
(manualSwitch or noRequest)
This management function allows the managing system to
initiate/terminate a forced switch from a working equipment
(main) to a protection one (spare). If another working
equipment has already been automatically or manually
switched to the protection one when the initiate command is
received, it is switched back to its working equipment to allow
the other working equipment to be switched to the protection
one.
This function will fail if another protected equipment is already
forced switched.
According to the NE type, this function will fail if the protection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-3.14
Initiate/Terminate
Forced Switch to a
Working Equipment

Protection SN
MP
If
F-3.15 Request
Y
Equipment Protection
Scheme Operational
State

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function
Status

F-3.16 Request
Equipment Protection
Status

F-3.17 Request
Equipment Protection
Switching Source

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

equipment has a failure condition.


This function involves the forcedSwitch syntax to initiate the
switch, the noRequest syntax to terminate the switch, both
addressed to a main protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitTable
(on main protection unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
(forcedSwitch or noRequest)
This management function allows the managing system to
initiate/terminate a forced switch from a protection equipment
(spare) to a working one (main). This management function is
applicable only in case of 1+1 not revertive protection type.
This function involves the forcedSwitch syntax to initiate the
switch, the noRequest syntax to terminate the switch, both
addressed to the spare protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitTable
(on spare protection unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
(forcedSwitch or noRequest)

Function Description
This management function allows the managing system to
request the operational state of an equipment protection
scheme.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB:
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET
on:
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupOperationalState
This management function allows the managing system to
request the current state of an equipment protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchCriteria
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchStatus
This management function allows the managing system to
request the source of the equipment switching request. This
management function is applicable only in case of dual ended
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

23/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-3.18 Report
Equipment Protection
Switch Event

switching.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET
on:
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchRequestSource
This management function allows the managed system to
report any protection switch event to the managing system,
such as:
protection switching (forced, manual or automatic
switch)
protection release (release of forced, manual or
automatic switch)
lockout, release lockout.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitTable
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP opticsIMProtectionSwitchReporting on:
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchCriteria
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchStatus

External Points
Point SN Function Description
MP
If
F-4.1 Condition External Y This management function allows a managing system to
Input Point User Label
configure the user label associated to an external input point.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalInputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on inputPointUserLabel
F-4.2 Request External
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Input Point User Label
request the user label associated to an external input point.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalInputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on inputPointUserLabel
F-4.3 Request External
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Input Point External
request the state of an external input point (on when the
State
alarm is raised, off otherwise).
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalInputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on inputPointExternalState
F-4.4 Condition External Y This management function allows a managing system to
Input Point ASAP Pointer
configure the ASAP Pointer associated to an external input
point.

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

24/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function
Input
Configuration

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-4.5 Request External


Input Point ASAP Pointer

F-4.6 Condition External


Input Point Polarity

F-4.7 Request External


Input Point Polarity

Function
Status

Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalInputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on inputPointAsapIndex
This management function allows a managing system to
request the ASAP Pointer associated to an external input point.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalInputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on inputPointAsapIndex
This management function allows a managing system to
configure the polarity of an external input point.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalInputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on inputPointPolarity
This management function allows a managing system to
request the polarity of an external input point.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalInputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on inputPointPolarity

Input

Point SN Function Description


MP
If
F-4.8 Request External
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Input Point Operational
request the operational state of an external input point.
State
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalInputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on inputPointOperationalState

Point SN Function Description


MP
If
F-4.9 Report
Y This management function allows a managed system to report
an alarm for a defect detected by an house-keeping interface.
Housekeeping Alarm
The housekeepingAlarm is the probable cause used.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalInputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP:
opticsIMHousekeepingAlarmRaise
opticsIMHousekeepingAlarmClear
1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function
Input
Notifications

Function Output
Configuration
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

Point SN Function Description


MP
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

25/202

This management function allows a managing system to


configure the user label associated to an external output
point.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalOutputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on outputPointUserLabel
F-4.11 Request External
Y This management function allows a managing system to
request the user label associated to an external output point.
Output Point User Label
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalOutputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on outputPointUserLabel
F-4.12 Condition
Y This management function allows a managing system to
configure the external state in order to command a remote
External Output Point
External State
control interface (on when the command is raised, off
otherwise).
In this way a contact closure interface can be opened or
closed, or a logic level output can be changed to high or low.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalOutputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on outputPointExternalState
F-4.13 Request External
Y This management function allows a managing system to
request the external state (on or off).
Output Point External
State
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalOutputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on outputPointExternalState
F-4.18 Condition
P This management function allows a managing system to
External Output Point
condition
Criteria
the output criteria (manual, automatic or remoteInputPoint). In
automatic control the external points are driven by defined
events.
In manual control they are driven by the operator. In
remoteInputPoint the external point is automatically managed
by the agent with the values assumed by the object of the
associated remote input point.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalOutputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on outputPointCriteria
Note F-4.18: remoteInputPoint criteria is not supported.
F-4.14 Request External
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Output Point Criteria
request the output criteria (manual or automatic). In automatic
control the external points are driven by defined events. In
manual control they are driven by the operator.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalOutputPointTable
ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

26/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

If
Y

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-4.10 Condition
External Output Point
User Label

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-4.15 Condition
External Output Point
Polarity

F-4.16 Request External


Output Point Polarity

F-4.19 Condition
External Output Point
Automatic Event

F-4.20 Request External


Output Point Automatic
Event

F-4.21 Request External


Output Point Automatic
Events List

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function
Status

Service Used
SNMP-GET on outputPointCriteria
This management function allows a managing system to
configure the polarity of an external output point.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalOutputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on outputPointPolarity
This management function allows a managing system to
request the polarity of an external output point.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalOutputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on outputPointPolarity
This management function allows a managing system to
configure the event type associated to an output point when
the outputPointCriteria object is set to automatic. This event
type
is
defined
setting
the
identifier
(outputPointAutomaticEventId object) associated to the event
type string required. As a side effect of this configuration, the
agent must set the outputPointAutomaticEvent object with the
vent type string associated to this identifier.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalOutputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on outputPointAutomaticEventId
This management function allows a managing system to
request the event type associated to an output point when the
outputPointCriteria object is set to automatic.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalOutputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
outputPointAutomaticEventId
outputPointAutomaticEvent
This management function allows a managing system to
request the list of events that can be associated to the external
output points when an automatic management of an output
point is active.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMOutputPointAllowedEventsTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on outputPointAllowedEvent

Point SN Function Description


MP
If
F-4.17 Request External
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Output Point
request the operational state of an external output point entry.
Operational State
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMExternalOutputPointTable
Service Used
ED

NTIAL
WTD

Output

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

27/202

Function
Input
Point SN
Configuration
for MPI
Remotization
f
F-4.22
Creation
of N
remotization of External
Input Point

F-4.23
Deletion
of
remotization of External
Input Point

F-4.24
Remotization
Destination

Request

Function Description
This management function allows a managing system to
configure the external input point (identified by
inputPointIndex) to be remotized on external output point of a
specified Ne (identified by IP address to be
provided).
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB:
opticsIMExternalInputPointRemotizationTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on inputPointRemotizationDestination
SNMP-SET on inputPointRemotizationRowStatus columnar
object to createAndGo value.
This management function allows a managing system to
delete the remotization of the external input point (identified
by inputPointIndex).
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB:
opticsIMExternalInputPointRemotizationTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on inputPointRemotizationRowStatus columnar
object to destroy value.
This management function allows a managing system to
request the IP address of remote NE on which the external
input point have to be remotized as output point.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB:
opticsIMExternalInputPointRemotizationTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on inputPointRemotizationDestination

Function Input Point


for
Remotization
Status
F-4.25
Request
Remotization Status

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

28/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

SN Function Description
M
PIf
N This management function allows a managing system to request
the status of the last remotization of the input point information
on the NE identified by inputPointRemotizationDestination.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB:
opticsIMExternalInputPointRemotizationTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on inputPointRemotizationStatus
F-4.26
Request N This management function allows a managing system to request
Remotization
Last
the time of the last remotization tried by the local agent.
Update
Scope

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

SNMP-GET on outputPointOperationalState

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB:
opticsIMExternalInputPointRemotizationTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on inputPointRemotizationLastUpdate
Function Input Point
for
Remotization
Manual Control
F-4.27
Condition
Manual Remotization

SN Function Description
M
PIf
N This management function allows a managing system to trigger
a manual updating of the destination output point (updating
value).
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB:
opticsIMExternalInputPointRemotizationTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on inputPointManualRemotization

Function Output Point


Configuration
from
Remote Input Point
F-4.28 Creation of
Remote External Input
Point

F-4.29
Remote
Point

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-4.30
Remote

ED

NTIAL
WTD

SN Function Description
M
PIf
N This management function allows a managing system to identify
the remote external input point which caracteristics have to be
provided on local output point (identified by outputPointIndex).
The managing system has to provide the IP address of the agent
where the remote input point is physically present and the index
(remoteInputPointIndex) of the remote
opticsIMExternalInputPointTable.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMRemoteExternalInputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on

RemoteInputPointAgent

RemoteInputPointIndex
SNMP-SET on remoteInputPointRowStatus columnar object to
createAndGo value.
Deletion of N This management function allows a managing system to delete
External Input
the configuration of local external output point (identified by
outputPointIndex) as remote input point
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMRemoteExternalInputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on remoteInputPointRowStatus columnar object to
destroy value.
Request N This management function allows a managing system to request
Agent
the IP address of agent where the remote input point is
physically present and the index of the remote input point on
opticsIMExternalInputPointTable.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMRemoteExternalInputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on

remoteInputPointAgent
01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

29/202

ED
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
M
PIf
N This management function allows a managing system to request
the time of the last update received from the agent concerning
the status of the remote input point.
Scope
OPTICSIM-EQPT-MIB: opticsIMRemoteExternalInputPointTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on remoteInputPointLastUpdate

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

30/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function Output Point


from Remote Input
Point Status
F-4.31 Request Last
Update from Remote

remoteInputPointIndex

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

3.6.1 Functional Objects Creation


The following tables define the functional objects created by the agent as consequence of the
equipment provisioning process.
Functional Objects
Created
6 opticsIMExternalInputPointEntry
7 opticsIMExternalOutputPointEntry
opticsIMPointToPointIPEntry
(NMS-RF, NMS-V11 and NMS-G.703)
1 opticsIMEowDTMFTTPBidEntry
1 opticsIMEowPartyLineEntry
1 opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidEntry
1 opticsIMCtUserTable

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

1 or 2 opticsIMCoderTTPEntry
1 or 2 opticsIMPdhFrameHopCurrentDataEntry
1 or 2 opticsIMLoopbackEntry [IDU cable
loopback]
1 or 2 opticsIMLoopbackExtEntry [IDU cable
loopback]
1 opticsIMFrameTTPEntry
2 ifMauEntry
2 ifAutoMauEntry
2 opticsIMMauExtEntry
4 opticsIMEthConfEntry
[RPS]
1 opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupEntry
2 opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitEntry
1 opticsIMRadioRxStaticDelayEntry
[EPS] (note 1)
1 opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupEntry
2 opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitEntry
[PM]
1 opticsIMPdhFrameLinkCurrentDataEntry
1 opticsIMTxProtectionGroupEntry
2 opticsIMTxProtectionUnitEntry
1 or 2 opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidEntry
1 or 2 opticsIMRadioFrequencyEntry
1 or 2 opticsIMRadioShifterEntry
1 or 2 opticsIMRadioTxPowerEntry
1 or 2 opticsIMRadioTxMuteEntry
1 or 2 opticsIMRadioAnalogueMeasureEntry
2 or 4 opticsIMLoopbackEntry [ODU loopbacks]
2 or 4 opticsIMLoopbackExtEntry [ODU loopbacks]

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

Creation Rules
In all the configurations

Only when the P-AC-SC optional plug-in


is configured and only for the main
board.
In all the configurations.
Entry related to the default administrator
user.
1 entry for in all the 1+0 configurations
2 entries in all the 1+1 configurations

In all the configurations


In all the 1+0 and 1+1 ETH
configurations
In all the 1+1 configurations

In all the 1+1 HSB configurations


1 entry in all the 1+0 configurations
2 entries in all the 1+1 configurations

When an ODU v2 is discovered:


1 entries in all the 1+0 configurations
2 entries in all the 1+1 configurations
In the other cases:
2 entries in all the 1+0 configurations
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

31/202

Functional Objects
Created

4 entries in all the 1+1 configurations


(note 1)

The objects related to EPS protection will not be created when the 1+1 configurations
without EPS MUX protection will be chosen.

3.7 Supported Objects and Naming Rules


The SNMP tables (with the columnar objects) and the scalar objects supported by this release are
provided in the following table.
For each table the indexes values of all the supported entries are provided too.
The general naming rules for the Equipment objects are defined in [17].
Table Entry
Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar)

Configuration

Description

Indexe
s
Value

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Creation Rules

opticsIMEqptMib

ED
WTD

01

It.01

See the Allowed Equipment Type section.

See the Allowed Equipment Type and Remote


Inventory sections.

All the 1+1 (note 1) EPS

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

32/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

opticsIMEquipmentTable
equipmentExpectedTypeId
equipmentExpected
equipmentActual
equipmentAdministrativeState
equipmentOperationalState
equipmentAsapIndex
equipmentLabel
opticsIMRemoteInventoryTable
remoteInventoryStatus
remoteInventoryCompanyIdentifier
remoteInventoryMnemonic
remoteInventoryCLEICode
remoteInventoryPartNumber
remoteInventorySoftwarePartNumber
remoteInventoryFactoryIdentifier
remoteInventorySerialNumber
remoteInventoryDateIdentifier
remoteInventoryDate
remoteInventoryCustomerField
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupTa
ble
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupType
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupRevertiv
e
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionGroupOperati
onalState

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Table Entry
Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar)

Configuration

Description

opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitTabl All the 1+1 (note 1) EPS Ch#1


e
EPS Ch#0
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitChannelN
umber
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitType
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchCo
mmand
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchCrite
ria
opticsIMEquipmentProtectionUnitSwitchStat
us
opticsIMExternalInputPointTable
All
inputPointUserLabel
inputPointExternalState
inputPointPolarity
inputPointAsapIndex
inputPointOperationalState
(note 1)

Indexe
s
Value
4; 1
4; 0

1..6

These objects are not supported in the 1+1 without EPS MUX protection configurations.
Table Entry
Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar)

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

opticsIMExternalOutputPointTable
outputPointUserLabel
outputPointExternalState
outputPointPolarity
outputPointCriteria
outputPointOperationalState
outputPointAutomaticEventId
outputPointAutomaticEvent
opticsIMOutputPointAllowedEventsTable
outputPointAllowedEvent

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

Configuratio
n
All

Indexe
Description
s
Value
External output points 1..4
Summarizing
5..7
(see the External
Points
Management
section)

All

See the External 1..8


Points
Management
section.

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

33/202

Description

Indexe
s
Value

opticsIMTribPortsImpedance
opticsIMHousekeepingAlarmRaise
opticsIMHousekeepingAlarmClear
opticsIMAlarmReplaceableUnitProblemRaise
opticsIMAlarmReplaceableUnitProblemClear
opticsIMAlarmReplaceableUnitMissingRaise
opticsIMAlarmReplaceableUnitMissingClear
opticsIMAlarmReplaceableUnitTypeMismatchRai
se
opticsIMAlarmReplaceableUnitTypeMismatchCle
ar
opticsIMAlarmUnconfiguredEquipmentPresentRa
ise
opticsIMAlarmUnconfiguredEquipmentPresentCl
ear
opticsIMAlarmVersionMismatchRaise
opticsIMAlarmVersionMismatchClear
opticsIMAlarmLanFailureRaise
opticsIMAlarmLanFailureClear
opticsIMAlarmBatteryFailRaise
opticsIMAlarmBatteryFailClear
opticsIMAlarmStandByVersionMismatchRaise
opticsIMAlarmStandByVersionMismatchClear
opticsIMAlarmFirmwareDownloadOnGoingRais
e
opticsIMAlarmFirmwareDownloadOnGoingClea
r

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

34/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Configuratio
n

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Table Entry
Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

TRANSMISSION INTERFACES (IFTABLE)

The following table defines the transmission interface types supported and managed in the ifTable.
Interface
Type

Interface
Number

ifDescr

E1 Tx

up to 32

E1 PPI

E3 Tx (note 2)
DS1 Tx (note 2)
DS3 Tx (note 2)

up to 1
up to 32
up to 1

E3 PPI
DS1 PPI
DS3 PPI

Gigabit Ethernet Tx

up to 4

gigabitEthernet

Radio PDH Frame


(note 3)

up to 2

PDH Radio

Auxiliary (note 4)

Management
Interfaces

V11
G703
PPP

Local Ethernet

LAPD

ifTable
ifType
ifSpeed
18
2 048 000
(note 1)
30
34 368 000
18
1 544 000
30
44 736 000
10 000 000 / 100 000
117
000/ 1000 000 000
78 336 000 (32E1)
39 168 000 (16E1)
1 (other)
19 584 000 (8 E1)
9 792 000 (4 E1)
4 896 000 (2 E1)
64
64 000
66
64 000
23
64 000
10 000 000 / 100 000
6
000
77
38 400

(note 1)
In IANAifType-MIB the e1 value (19) is declared obsoleted. The RFC 2495 (see [1])
doesnt distinguish between DS1 and E1 and requires to use for the ifType object, the ds1 value
(18) for both these types of interfaces. However this RFC is not included in Optics-IM. DS1 and E1
signals are managed with a proprietary MIB.
(note 2)

Not supported.

(note 3)

ifSpeed object is set according to the frame structure configuration.

(note 4)

ifSpeed object is set according to the auxiliary interface type configuration.

The ifTable entries will be created by the agent as consequence of the provisioning process (i.e. frame
structure and auxiliary channel configuration).
The global number of interfaces and then the value of ifNumber scalar object depends on the
tributaries type and number.

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

4.1 Management Functions


The managing system can request (SNMP-GET) the value of the following ifTable objects:
ifDescr
ifType
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

35/202

ifSpeed

SNMP-SET operation on ifType and ifSpeed objects is not supported.


The managing system can also request (SNMP-GET) the value of the ifNumber scalar object.

4.2 SNMP Tables


4.2.1 Supported objects
The Interfaces Group tables, columnar and scalar objects supported by this release are the following:
mib-2
ifTable
ifDescr
ifType
ifSpeed

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

ifNumber

4.3 Naming Rules


The general naming rule for the transmission interfaces is defined in [17].
The following table provides the relationship between ifIndex value and associated proprietary
extension tables.
ifTable
ifIndex
20101
20100

E1 Tx

1yy01 or
1yy99
(note 1)
(note 2)
Gigabit Ethernet 1zz01
Tx
(note 3)
Auxiliary
301
PPP-RF
1
PPP-V11
2
PPP-G703
3
Local Ethernet
100
LAPD/F
200

ED
WTD

01

It.01

Associated
Mib
opticsIMRadioTrsPdhMib
opticsIMRadioTrsCommon
Mib

opticsIMTrsCommonMib

Associated
Table
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable
opticsIMRadioFrequencyTable
opticsIMRadioShifterTable
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
opticsIMRadioAnalogueMeasuresTab
le
opticsIMRadioTxMuteTable
opticsIME1pPITTPTable
opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionTable

mauMod
opticsIMEthNEMib
opticsIMOverheadMib
opticsIMCommRouMib

ifMauTable
opticsIMMauExtTable
opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidTable
opticsIMPointToPointIPTable

opticsIMLocalEthernetTable
-

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

36/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Interface
Type
Radio PDH
Frame

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

(note 1)
yy = 01..32; 1yy01 in case of 1+0 configurations, 1yy99 in case of 1+1
configurations.
(note 2)
The naming related to 1+0 configuration has to be used when a configuration 1+1
without EPS MUX protection is chosen.
(note 3)

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

zz = 33..36

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

37/202

SDH/PDH TRANSMISSION DOMAIN

5.1 Functional Description


1+1 Configurations Functional View
Tx Functional View

<trib>-TX
(sink)

<trib>-RX
(source)

Aggregate
(source)

Radio
(source)

Ch#1

Aggregate
(source)

Radio
(source)

Ch#0

Aggregate
(sink)

Radio
(sink)

Ch#1

MUX
(source)
(note 1)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Rx Functional View

<trib>-RX
(sink)

<trib>-TX
(source)

DEMUX
(sink)
(note 1)

Aggregate
(sink)

Radio
(sink)

Ch#0

RPS hitless

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

38/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

A bi-directional EPS protection scheme is always supported in all the 1+1 configurations (except in
1+1 configurations without EPS MUX protection, see below).

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1+1 Configurations Functional View without EPS MUX protection


In the 1+1 configurations without EPS MUX protection, the functional views are the following:
Tx Functional View
<trib>-TX
(sink)

MUX
(source)

<trib>-RX
(source)

Aggregate
(source)

Radio
(source)

Ch#1

Aggregate
(source)

Radio
(source)

Ch#0

Aggregate
(sink)

Radio
(sink)

Ch#1

Rx Functional View
<trib>-TX
(source)

<trib>-RX
(sink)

DEMUX
(sink)

Aggregate
(sink)

Radio
(sink)

Ch#0

RPS hitless
The mapping between the functional blocks indicated in the functional views above and SNMP MIB
tables is the following:

<trib>-TX
<trib>-RX
MUX, DEMUX
Aggregate
Radio

=>
=>
=>
=>
=>

opticsIME1pPITTPTable
opticsIME1PathTTPTable
opticsIMFrameTTPTable
opticsIMCoderTTPTable
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

N.B. SNMP tables are created only if necessary from management point of view.
Frame Structure Configuration
The type and number of PDH interfaces (the frame structure configuration) are defined by the F-2.2
management function. According to the market type and NE configurations the allowed frame
structures are defined in the following table. They are impacted also by the content of the SW key
(Flash Card type).
Furthermore:
the 2E1 frame structure configurations cannot be associated to 16 QAM modulation;
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

39/202

Market
Type
ETSI

(note 1)

NE
Configurations
All the Radio configurations 16E1/DS1
(without Ethernet interface) (note 1)
All the Radio configurations 16E1/DS1
(with Ethernet interface) (note 1)
All the Radio configurations 32E1/DS1
(note 1)
All the Radio configurations E3/DS3
(note 1)

Allowed Frame
Structures
twoE1, fourE1, eightE1, sixteenE1
twoE1, fourE1, eightE1, sixteenE1,
thirty-twoE1
twoE1, fourE1, eightE1, sixteenE1,
thirty-twoE1
oneE3

The E3/DS3, DS1 tributaries, are not supported.

Hereafter, the supported frame structure configurations and the PDH tributaries objects that must be
created as a consequence of the frame structure definition and of the NE Configurations, are
provided.
NE

Frame Structure
Configuration

twoE1

fourE1

eightE1

sixteenE1

thirty-twoE1

Configurations

Functional Objects Created

All the Radio configurations 2 opticsIME1pPITTPEntry


16E1/DS1 or 32E1/DS1
2 opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionEntry
(note 4)
2 opticsIME1PathTTPEntry
2 opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionEntry
All the Radio configurations 4 opticsIME1pPITTPEntry
16E1/DS1 or 32E1/DS1
4 opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionEntry
(note 4)
4 opticsIME1PathTTPEntry
4 opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionEntry
All the Radio configurations 8 opticsIME1pPITTPEntry
16E1/DS1 or 32E1/DS1
8 opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionEntry
(note 4)
8 opticsIME1PathTTPEntry
8 opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionEntry
All the Radio configurations 16 opticsIME1pPITTPEntry
16E1/DS1 or 32E1/DS1
16 opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionEntry
(note 4)
16 opticsIME1PathTTPEntry
16 opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionEntry
All the Radio configurations 16 opticsIME1pPITTPEntry
16E1/DS1 (with Ethernet 16 opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionEntry
interface)
16 opticsIME1PathTTPEntry
(note 3) (note 4)
16 opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionEntry
All the Radio configurations 32 opticsIME1pPITTPEntry
32E1/DS1
32 opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionEntry
32 opticsIME1PathTTPEntry
32 opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionEntry

(note 1)
(note 2)
(note 1)
(note 2)
(note 1)
(note 2)
(note 1)
(note 2)
(note 1)
(note 2)
(note 1)
(note 2)

N.B.: The naming of the objects above depends on the configuration. See the ifIndex values in the
naming rule section.

ED
WTD

01

It.01

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

the 4E1 frame structure configurations cannot be associated to 16 QAM modulation for ODU
v2 4/16QAM (incompatibleCapacity alarm will be raised).

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

40/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

(note 1)

pdhRAIInsertionSignalType object = e1pPI

(note 2)

pdhRAIInsertionSignalType object = e1Path

(note 3)
In this case, the allowed configurations are: M GE 10/100/1000 Base T + N E1/DS1,
where M 4 and N 16.
(note 4)
DS1 signal is not supported.
Additionally, for each pPI and Path functional object created, the associated loopback objects are
created too, according to the schema described in the following table.
Tributary Objects
Created
y pPITTP
(note 1)
y PathTTP
(note 1)

Loopback Objects Created


y
y
y
y

opticsIMLoopbackEntry
opticsIMLoopbackExtEntry
opticsIMLoopbackEntry
opticsIMLoopbackExtEntry

(note 1)
y = up to 32 in case of E1 or DS1 (DS1 not supported), y = 1 in case of E3 or DS3
(E3/DS3 not supported).
ASAP Management
As the Asap Index object is not supported on the <trib>PathTTP tables, the severity of the alarms
addressed to instances of these tables is provided by the ASAP configured for the associated instance
(with the same port identifier) of the corresponding <trib>pPITTP table.
In the same way the severity of alarms addressed to instances of frameTTPTable and coderTTPTable is
provided by the ASAP configured for the associated instance (with the same ifIndex value for
coderTTPTable, related to Ch#1 for frameTTPTable) of the radioPDHTTPBidTable.
BER Measures Management

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

A BER measure is marked as suspect (columnar object berMeasureSuspectIntervalFlag set to TRUE


value) in case of Loss of measurement data in the equipment. This happens if at least one of the
following conditions occurs in the collection period (from Create BER measure entry to request BER
Measure Data):
RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing) alarm on the equipment involved on BER measure.
RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem) alarm on the equipment involved on BER measure (if the
violation data are not accessible)

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

41/202

The following table lists the SDH/PDH Transmission management functions supported in this release
(see [10]).
Generic Trail Termination Point Functions
Function Configuration

SN Function Description
MP
If
F-1.1 Request TTP ASAP
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Pointer
request the ASAP Pointer associated to a trail termination
point.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-xxxx-MIB:
Trail
Termination
Point
(xTTPBidTable)
Service Used
SNMP-GET on xTTPBidAsapIndex columnar object
Note F-1.1: Supported on the TPs managed in this release.
F-1.2 Condition TTP
Y This management function allows a managing system to
ASAP Pointer
configure the ASAP Pointer associated to a trail termination
point.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-xxxx-MIB:
Trail
Termination
Point
(xTTPBidTable)
Service Used
SNMP-SET on: xTTPBidAsapIndex columnar object
Note F-1.2: Supported on the TPs managed in this release.
Function TP Status
F-1.3 Request TTP
Operational State

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

5.2 Management Functions

SN Function Description
MP
If
Y This management function allows the managing system to
request the operational state of a trail termination point.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-xxxx-MIB:
Trail
Termination
Point
(xTTPBidTable)
Service Used
SNMP-GET on xTTPBidOperationalState columnar object

Function Configuration
F-1.xx All the functions

ED
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
MP
If
N

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

42/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

SDH Functions
Trail Termination Point

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function Notifications
F-1.xx All the functions

Automatic Laser Shutdown


Functions
F-1.xx All the functions
PDH Frame Functions
Function Configurations
F-2.1 Request Frame
Structure Configuration

F-2.2 Condition Frame


Structure Configuration

F-2.3 Request Link


Identifier Parameters

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

SN Function Description
MP
If
N

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
MP
If
N
SN Function Description
MP
If
Y This management function allows the managing system to
request the configuration of the frame structure.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMFrameStructureConfiguration
Service Used
SNMP-GET
on
the
scalar
object
opticsIMFrameStructureConfiguration
Y This management function allows the managing system to
set the configuration of the frame structure.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMFrameStructureConfiguration
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
the
scalar
object
opticsIMFrameStructureConfiguration
Y This management function allows the managing system to
request the value of the parameters related to the Link
Identifier management:
The expected mode on the receiving NE
(opticsIMLinkldExpectedMode).
If the disabled mode is selected the link identifier mismatch
detection is disabled. If the enabled mode is selected the
expected
value
is
contained
in
the
opticsIMLinkIdExpectedValue scalar object.
The expected value on the receiving NE
(opticsIMLinkIdExpectedValue).
The transmitted value on the transmitting NE
(opticsIMLinkldSentValue).
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMLinkIdMngt
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following scalar objects:
opticsIMLinkldExpectedMode
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

43/202

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

44/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel
1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

opticsIMLinkIdExpectedValue
opticsIMLinkIdSentValue
F-2.4 Condition Link
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Identifier Parameters
condition the parameters related to the Link Identifier
management:
The expected mode on the receiving NE
(opticsIMLinkldExpectedMode).
The expected value on the receiving NE
(opticsIMLinkIdExpectedValue).
The transmitted value on the transmitting NE
(opticsIMLinkldSentValue).
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMLinkIdMngt
Service Used
SNMP-SET on:
opticsIMLinkldExpectedMode
opticsIMLinkIdExpectedValue
opticsIMLinkIdSentValue
Note F-2.4: Allowed values: 0 31.
F-2.5 Condition BER
N This management function allows the managing system to
set the thresholds used to raise the highBER and lowBER
Alarms Thresholds
alarms. Both these values must be included in the related
allowed range. The high BER threshold must be greater than
the low BER one.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMBERThresholdMngt
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following scalar objects:
opticsIMHighBERThr
opticsIMLowBERThr
F-2.6 Request BER
N This management function allows the managing system to
Alarms Thresholds
request the thresholds used to raise respectively a PDH
highBER and lowBER alarms.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMBERThresholdMngt
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following scalar objects:
opticsIMHighBERThr
opticsIMLowBERThr
F-2.7 Request BER
N This management function allows the managing system to
Alarms Thresholds
request the minimum and maximum values allowed for the
thresholds used to raise the PDH highBER and lowBER
Ranges
alarms.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMBERThresholdMngt
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following scalar objects:
opticsIMHighBERMinThr
opticsIMHighBERMaxThr

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F- 2.11 Request
interleaving status

F- 2.12 Condition
interleaving function

F- 2.13 Condition EW
alarm BER Thresholds

F- 2.14 Request EW
alarm BER Thresholds

F- 2.15 Request EW
alarm BER Thresholds
Ranges

opticsIMLowBERMinThr
opticsIMLowBERMaxThr
This management function allows the managing system to
request the status of interleaving functionality.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-PDH-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-GET
on
the
following
scalar
object
opticsIMInterleaving.
This management function allows the managing system to
enable/disable the interleaving functionality.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-PDH-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
the
following
scalar
object
opticsIMInterleaving.
This management function allows the managing system to
set the BER threshold used to raise the EW alarm. This value
must be included in the allowed range.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMBERThresholdMngt
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following scalar objects:

opticsIMEWBERThr
This management function allows the managing system to
request the BER thresholds used to raise a EW alarm.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMBERThresholdMngt
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following scalar objects:

opticsIMEWBERThr
This management function allows the managing system to
request the minimum and maximum values allowed for the
BER thresholds used to raise EW alarm.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMBERThresholdMngt
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following scalar objects:

opticsIMEWBERMinThr

opticsIMEWBERMaxThr

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function Notifications

SN Function Description
MP
If
F-2.9 Report PDH Frame Y This management function allows a managed system to
Alarms
report transmission alarms related to the PDH frame.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMFrameTTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP:
opticsIMAlarmLossOfFrameRaise
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

45/202

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

46/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-2.10 Report PDH


Coder Alarms

opticsIMAlarmLossOfFrameClear
opticsIMAlarmLinkIdentifierMismatchRaise
opticsIMAlarmLinkIdentifierMismatchClear
This management function allows a managed system to
report transmission alarms related to the PDH coder.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMCoderTTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP:
opticsIMAlarmCableLOSRaise
opticsIMAlarmCableLOSClear
opticsIMAlarmLossOfFrameRaise
opticsIMAlarmLossOfFrameClear
opticsIMAlarmHighBERRaise
opticsIMAlarmHighBERClear
opticsIMAlarmLowBERRaise
opticsIMAlarmLowBERClear

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

PDH Tributaries Functions


Function Configuration

SN Function Description
MP
If
F-3.1 Request E1 Signal
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Processing Mode
request which processing mode is activated on an E1 signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME1pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on e1pPITTPSignalMode
F-3.2 Condition E1
P This management function allows a managing system to
Signal Processing Mode
condition the E1 signal processing mode. The allowed signal
processing modes are:
disabled
unframed
framed (G.704)
framed (G.704) ISDN PRA (ETS 300 233)
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME1pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on e1pPITTPSignalMode
Note F-3.2: Only unframed and framed (G.704) modes are supported.
F-3.3 Request E1 Frame
N This management function allows a managing system to
Status
request whether a CRC indication (multiframe presence) is
detected on a E1 signal when the processing of a framed
signal is activated.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME1pPITTPTable
opticsIME1PathTTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on (respectively):
e1pPITTPFrameStatus
e1PathTTPFrameStatus
F-3.4 Request RAI
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Insertion Status
request the status of the RAI insertion in a E1 or DS3 framed
signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
pdhRAIInsertionSignalType
pdhRAIInsertionStatus
Note F-3.4: Supported only on E1 signals (pPI and Path).
F-3.5 Condition RAI
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Insertion Status
condition the RAI insertion inhibition in a E1 or DS3 framed
signal, both physical interface and path side. The status
allowed are the following:
enabled
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

47/202

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

48/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel
1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

inhibited
forced
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on pdhRAIInsertionStatus
Note F-3.5: Supported only on E1 signals (pPI and Path). Values supported:
enabled
forced
F-3.8 Request E3 Signal
N This management function allows a managing system to
Processing Mode
request which processing mode is activated on a E3 signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on e3pPITTPSignalMode
F-3.9 Condition E3
N This management function allows a managing system to
condition the E3 signal processing mode. The allowed signal
Signal Processing Mode
processing modes are:
disabled
unframed
framed (G.704) G.751
framed (G.704) G.753
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on e3pPITTPSignalMode
Note F-3.9: the framed (G.704) G.753 value is not supported
F-3.10 Request DS1
N This management function allows a managing system to
Signal Processing Mode
request which processing mode is activated on a DS1 signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMDs1pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ds1pPITTPSignalMode
F-3.11 Condition DS1
N This management function allows a managing system to
condition the processing mode of a DS1 signal. The allowed
Signal Processing Mode
signal processing modes are:
disabled
unframed
framed (G.704) with 12 frames multiframe (Super
Frame)
framed (G.704) with 24 frames multiframe (Extended
Super Frame)
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMDs1pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ds1pPITTPSignalMode

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-3.12 Request DS3


Signal Processing Mode

F-3.13 Condition DS3


Signal Processing Mode

F-3.14 Request DS1 Line


Coding

F-3.15 Condition DS1


Line Coding

F-3.16 Condition Global


DS1 Line Coding

F-3.17 Request DS1 Line


Length

F-3.18 Condition DS1


Line Length

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

This management function allows a managing system to


request which processing mode is activated on a DS3 signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMDs3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ds3pPITTPSignalMode
This management function allows a managing system to
condition the processing mode of a DS3 signal. The allowed
signal processing modes are:
disabled
unframed
framed (G.704)
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMDs3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ds3pPITTPSignalMode
This management function allows a managing system to
request the line coding of a DS1 signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMDs1pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ds1pPITTPLineCoding
This management function allows a managing system to
condition the line coding of a DS1 signal. The allowed
values are the following:
AMI
B8ZS
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMDs1pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ds1pPITTPLineCoding
This management function allows a managing system to
specify, in one shot, the code for all the DS1 lines.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMAllDs1LineCoding
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the scalar opticsIMAllDs1LineCoding
This management function allows a managing system to
request the length of a DS1 line. It provides information for
Line Build Out circuitry.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMDs1pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ds1pPITTPLineLength
This management function allows a managing system to
condition the length of a DS1 line.
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

49/202

F-3.25 Request DS1 Line


Length Allowed Ranges

F- 3.33 Request E1/DS1


AIS Signal Type

F- 3.34 Condition E1/DS1


AIS Signal Type

F- 3.35 Condition Global


E1/DS1 AIS Signal Type

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

50/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-3.19 Condition Global


DS1 Line Length

Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMDs1pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ds1pPITTPLineLength
This management function allows a managing system to
condition, in one shot, the length of all the DS1 lines.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMAllDs1LineLength
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the scalar object opticsIMAllDs1LineLength
This management function allows a managing system to
request the ranges of Ds1 line lengths allowed on NE.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMAllowedDS1LineLengthsTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on
allowedLineLengthId
allowedLineLengthMin
allowedLineLengthMax
This management function allows a managing system to
request which AIS Signal type (allOnes or AllZeroes) is
activated on an E1 signal or on DS1 signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME1pPITTPTable,
opticsIMDS1pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET
on
e1pPITTPAISSignalType
(opticsIME1pPITTPTable)
or
ds1pPITTPAISSignalType
(opticsIMDS1pPITTPTable).
This management function allows a managing system to
condition which AIS Signal type (allOnes or AllZeroes) is
activated on an E1 signal or on an DS1 signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME1pPITTPTable,
opticsIMDS1pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on:
e1pPITTPAISSignalType
(opticsIME1pPITTPTable)
or
ds1pPITTPAISSignalType
(opticsIMDS1pPITTPTable).
This management function allows a managing system to
condition, in one shot, the AIS Signal Type (allOnes or
AllZeroes) of all the E1 lines or for all the DS1 lines.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the scalar object opticsIMAllE1AISSignalType
or opticsIMAllDS1AISSignalType.

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F- 3.36 Request E1/DS1


pPI AIS Insertion

F- 3.37 Condition E1/DS1


pPI AIS Insertion

F- 3.38 Condition Global


E1/DS1 pPI AIS Insertion

F- 3.39 Request E1/DS1


Path AIS Insertion

F- 3.40 Condition E1/DS1


Path AIS Insertion

F- 3.41 Condition Global


E1/DS1 Path AIS
Insertion

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

This management function allows a managing system to


request if insertion of AIS Signal is activated on 2 Mbit/s or
on 1,5 Mbit/s PDH trails.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME1pPITTPTable,
opticsIMDS1pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on e1pPITTPAISInsertion (opticsIME1pPITTPTable)
or ds1pPITTPAISInsertion (opticsIMDS1pPITTPTable)
This management function allows a managing system to
enable/disable the AIS Signal insertion for 2 Mbit/sor for 1,5
Mbit/s PDH trails.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME1pPITTPTable,
opticsIMDS1pPITTPTable.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on e1pPITTPAISInsertion (opticsIME1pPITTPTable)
or ds1pPITTPAISInsertion (opticsIMDS1pPITTPTable).
This management function allows a managing system to
condition, in one shot, the AIS Signal insertion for all the 2
Mbit/s or for all the 1,5 Mbit/s PDH trails.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the scalar object opticsIMAllE1pPIAISInsertion
or opticsIMAllDS1pPIAISInsertion
This management function allows a managing system to
request if insertion of AIS Signal is activated on 2 Mbit/s or
1,5 Mbit/s path.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME1PathTTPTable,
opticsIMDS1PathTTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET
on
e1PathTTPAISInsertion
(opticsIME1PathTTPTable)
or
ds1PathTTPAISInsertion
(opticsIMDS1PathTTPTable).
This management function allows a managing system to
enable/disable the AIS Signal insertion for 2 Mbit/s or 1,5
Mbit/s path.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME1PathTTPTable,
opticsIMDS1PathTTPTable.
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
e1PathTTPAISInsertion
(opticsIME1PathTTPTable)
or
ds1PathTTPAISInsertion
(opticsIMDS1PathTTPTable).
This management function allows a managing system to
condition, in one shot, the AIS Signal insertion for all the 2
Mbit/s or 1,5 Mbit/s paths.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB
Service Used
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

51/202

F- 3.43 Condition DS3


AIS Signal Type

F- 3.44 Condition Global


DS3 AIS Signal Type

F- 3.45 Request DS3 pPI


AIS Insertion

F- 3.46 Condition DS3


pPI AIS Insertion

F- 3.47 Condition Global


DS3 pPI AIS Insertion

F- 3.48 Request DS3 Path


AIS Insertion

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

52/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F- 3.42 Request DS3 AIS


Signal Type

SNMP-SET on the scalar object opticsIMAllE1pPIAISInsertion


or opticsIMAllDS1pPIAISInsertion.
This management function allows a managing system to
request which AIS Signal type (allOnes or blueSignal) is
activated on an DS3 signal. It is applicable only on framed
signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIMDs3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ds3pPITTPAISSignalType
This management function allows a managing system to
condition which AIS Signal type (allOnes or blueSignal) is
activated on an DS3 signal. It is applicable only on framed
signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIMDs3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ds3pPITTPAISSignalType
This management function allows a managing system to
condition, in one shot, the AIS Signal Type (allOnes or
blueSignal) of all the DS3 lines. It is applicable only on
framed signals.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the scalar object opticsIMAllDS3AISSignalType
This management function allows a managing system to
request if insertion of AIS Signal is activated on 45 Mbit/s
PDH trails. It is applicable only on framed signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIMDs3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ds3pPITTPAISInsertion
This management function allows a managing system to
enable/disable the AIS Signal insertion for 45 Mbit/s PDH
trails. It is applicable only on framed signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIMDs3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ds3pPITTPAISInsertion.
This management function allows a managing system to
condition, in one shot, the AIS Signal insertion for all the 45
Mbit/s PDH trails. It is applicable only on framed signals.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the scalar object opticsIMAllDs3pPIAISInsertion
This management function allows a managing system to
request if insertion of AIS Signal is activated on 45 Mbit/s
path. It is applicable only on framed signal.

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIMDs3PathTTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ds3PathTTPAISInsertion.
F- 3.49 Condition DS3
N This management function allows a managing system to
Path AIS Insertion
enable/disable the AIS Signal insertion for 45 Mbit/s path. It
is applicable only on framed signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIMDs3PathTTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ds3PathTTPAISInsertion.
F- 3.50 Condition Global N This management function allows a managing system to
DS3 Path AIS Insertion
condition, in one shot, the AIS Signal insertion for all the 45
Mbit/s paths. It is applicable only on framed signals.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
the
scalar
object
opticsIMAllDs3PathAISInsertion
F- 3.51 Request DS3 AIS
N This management function allows a managing system to
Signal Timing
request the time to wait before to insert an AIS signal (after
failure detection) and the time to wait to remove an AIS
signal (after the failure clear) on an DS3 line. It is applicable
only on framed signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIMDs3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ds3pPITTPAISSignalTiming
Note F-3.51: The time waiting for the insertion and the removing AIS signal is 3 msec.
F- 3.52 Condition DS3
N This management function allows a managing system to
AIS Signal Timing
condition the time to wait before to insert an AIS signal (after
failure detection) and the time to wait to remove an AIS
signal (after the failure clear) on a DS3 line. It is applicable
only on framed signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIMDs3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ds3pPITTPAISSignalTiming
F- 3.53 Condition Global N This management function allows a managing system to
DS3 AIS Signal Timing
condition, in one shot, the time to wait before to insert an
AIS signal (after failure detection) and the time to wait to
remove an AIS signal (after the failure clear) for all the DS3
lines. It is applicable only on framed signals.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
the
scalar
object
opticsIMAllDS3AISSignalTiming
F- 3.54 Request DS3 pPI
N This management function allows a managing system to
Parity Violation
request if Parity Violation Monitoring Removing is enabled or
Monitoring Removing
disabled on 45 Mbit/s trail. It is applicable only on framed
signal.
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

53/202

F- 3.56 Condition Global


DS3 pPI Parity Violation
Monitoring Removing

F- 3.57 Request DS3 Path


Parity Violation
Monitoring Removing

F- 3.58 Condition DS3


Path Parity Violation
Monitoring Removing

F- 3.59 Condition Global


DS3 Path Parity Violation
Monitoring Removing

F- 3.60 Request DS3 Idle


insertion and detection

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

54/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F- 3.55 Condition DS3


pPI Parity Violation
Monitoring Removing

Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIMDs3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ds3pPITTPParityViolationMonitoringRemoving.
This management function allows a managing system to
enable/disable the Parity Violation Monitoring Removing for
45 Mbit/s trail. It is applicable only on framed signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIMDs3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ds3pPITTPParityViolationMonitoringRemoving.
This management function allows a managing system to
condition, in one shot, the Parity Violation Monitoring
Removing for all the 45 Mbit/s trails. It is applicable only on
framed signals.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
the
scalar
object
opticsIMAllDs3pPIParityViolationMonitoringRemoving
This management function allows a managing system to
request if Parity Violation Monitoring Removing is enabled or
disabled on 45 Mbit/s path. It is applicable only on framed
signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIMDs3PathTTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET
on
ds3PathTTPParityViolationMonitoringRemoving.
This management function allows a managing system to
enable/disable the Parity Violation Monitoring Removing for
45 Mbit/s path. It is applicable only on framed signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIMDs3PathTTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
ds3PathTTPParityViolationMonitoringRemoving.
This management function allows a managing system to
condition, in one shot, the Parity Violation Monitoring
Removing for all the 45 Mbit/s paths. It is applicable only on
framed signals.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
the
scalar
object
opticsIMAllDs3PathParityViolationMonitoringRemoving
This management function allows a managing system to
request if idle insertion is activated on one direction and the
status (detection) of idle insertion on the other direction for
an DS3 signal. It is applicable only on framed signal.

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F- 3.61 Condition DS3


Idle insertion

F- 3.62 Request DS3


Line Bridge Status

F- 3.63 Condition DS3


Line Bridge

F- 3.64 Request E1/E3


pseudo-random pattern
insertion

F- 3.65 Condition E1/E3


pseudo-random pattern
insertion

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIMAllDs3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on

ds3pPITTPIdleInsertion

ds3pPITTPIdleDetection
This management function allows a managing system to
condition the idle insertion on an DS3 signal. It is applicable
only on framed signal.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIMAllDs3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ds3pPITTPIdleInsertion
This management function allows a managing system to
request if this selected DS3 line is used to bridge and other
DS3 line.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMDs3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on
ds3pPITTPInputBridgeEnabled
This management function allows a managing system to
configure the input bridge for DS3 lines.
The managing system has to provided for each DS3 line if
the bridge is enabled is or disabled. If the enabled value is
setted, than an other DS3 line (equipment dependent,
identified by notApplicable value on same object) is
bridged onto this selected line. The notApplicable value is
used to identifie the DS3 line to bridge.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMDs3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ds3pPITTPInputBridgeEnabled
This management function allows a managing system to
request if insertion of pseudo-random pattern is activated on
tributary x (E1 or E3 signal).
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME1pPITTPTable
, opticsIME3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
e1pPITTPPseudoRandSeqInsertion (opticsIME1pPITTPTable)
or
e3pPITTPPseudoRandSeqInsertion (opticsIME3pPITTPTable).
This management function allows a managing system to
condition the insertion of pseudo-random pattern on
tributary x (E1 or E3 signal).
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME1pPITTPTable
, opticsIME3pPITTPTable
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

55/202

Function Notifications

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

56/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

SN Function Description
MP
If
F-3.20 Report PDH
Y This management function allows a managed system to
Physical Interface Alarms
report transmission alarms related to PDH physical
interfaces.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME1pPITTPTable
opticsIME3pPITTPTable
opticsIMDs1pPITTPTable
opticsIMDs3pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP:
opticsIMAlarmLossOfSignalRaise
opticsIMAlarmLossOfSignalClear
opticsIMAlarmLossOfFrameRaise
opticsIMAlarmLossOfFrameClear
opticsIMAlarmAisRaise
opticsIMAlarmAisClear
opticsIMAlarmRemoteDefectIndicationRaise (E1 and
DS3 only)
opticsIMAlarmRemoteDefectIndicationClear (E1 and
DS3 only)
Note F-3.20: The following SNMP-TRAP are referred only to PDH framed tributaries:
opticsIMAlarmLossOfFrameRaise/Clear
opticsIMAlarmRemoteDefectIndicationRaise/Clear
F-3.21 Report PDH Path
Y This management function allows a managed system to

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Service Used
SNMP-SET on:
e1pPITTPPseudoRandSeqInsertion (opticsIME1pPITTPTable)
or
e3pPITTPPseudoRandSeqInsertion (opticsIME3pPITTPTable).
F- 3.66p Create Time
Y This function allows to set the Time Slot number inside the E1
Slot number inside E1
tributary to transport the TMN.
Scope
tributary for TMN in
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIME1pPITTPTable
frame management
Service Used
SNMP-SET on e1pPITTPTimeSlotTMN.
F- 3.67p Request Time
Y This function allows to get the Time Slot number inside the
Slot number inside E1
E1 tributary to transport the TMN.
Scope
tributary for TMN in
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB: opticsIME1pPITTPTable
frame management
Service Used
SNMP-GET on e1pPITTPTimeSlotTMN.
Note F-3.66p and F-3.67p: The default value is -1: it means the E1 tributary is not able to
transport the TMN. Only the E1#1 is able to transport the TMN in frame: the Time Slot number
can be chosen in the range 131 (the TS=16 is not allowed).

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Alarms

F-3.22 Report PDH Loss


Alarm Due to Switch

report transmission alarms related to PDH paths.


Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME1PathTTPTable
opticsIME3PathTTPTable
opticsIMDs1PathTTPTable
opticsIMDs3PathTTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP:
opticsIMAlarmLossOfFrameRaise
opticsIMAlarmLossOfFrameClear
opticsIMAlarmAisRaise
opticsIMAlarmAisClear
opticsIMAlarmRemoteDefectIndicationRaise (E1 and
DS3 only)
opticsIMAlarmRemoteDefectIndicationClear (E1 and
DS3 only)
This management function allows a managed system to
report the loss of the PDH signals due to switch for
protection of Fast Ethernet signals.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIME1pPITTPTable
opticsIMDs1pPITTPTable
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP:
opticsIMPdhLossDueToSwitchRaise
opticsIMPdhLossDueToSwitchClear

BER Measure Functions


Function
F-3.30 Create BER
Measure Entry

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-3.31 Delete BER


Measure Entry

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
MP
If
Y This management function allows the managing system to
create a BER measure entry. The management system has to
indicate in the creation request: the monitoring point which it
is associated to (indicated by means of ifIndex).
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMBERMeasureTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on berMeasureRowStatus columnar object to
createAndGo value
Y This management function allows the managing system to
delete a BER measure entry.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMBERMeasureTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on berMeasureRowStatus columnar object to
destroy value
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

57/202

This management function allows the managing system to


request the BER measure data related to the current
observation period.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMBERMeasureTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following columnar objects:
berMeasureElapsedTime
berMeasureSuspectIntervalFlag
berMeasureViolations
berMeasureValue
Note F-3.32: berMeasureViolations is not supported.

5.3 Supported Objects and Naming Rules

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-3.32 Request BER


Measure Data

The SNMP tables (with the columnar objects) and the scalar objects supported by this release are
provided in the following table.
For each table, according to the configuration the indexes values of all the supported entries are
provided too.
The general naming rules for the SDH/PDH Transmission objects are defined in [17].
N.B. In the following table, when the configuration is 1+1 without EPS MUX protection, then the
indexes value are those one used for the All the 1+0 configuration, except for
opticsIMBERMeasureTable, opticsIMFrameTTPTable and opticsIMCoderTTPTable because they are
referred to radio port.
Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar)

Table Entry
Configura
tion

Description

Indexes
Value

opticsIMTrsCommonMib

opticsIME1PathTTPTable
e1PathTTPOperationalState

All the 1+0 E1 Tx ports Ch#1


All the 1+1 E1
Tx
ports
Ch#Common
All the 1+0 E1 Rx ports Ch#1
All the 1+1 E1
Rx
ports
Ch#Common

opticsIMBERMeasureTable

ED
WTD

01

It.01

All the 1+0 Radio port Ch#1


All the 1+1 Radio port Ch#1

1xx01
(xx
01..32)
1xx99
(xx
01..32)
2xx01
(xx
01..32)
2xx99
(xx
01..32)
20101
20101

=
=

=
=

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

58/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

opticsIME1pPITTPTable
e1pPITTPSignalMode
e1pPITTPOperationalState
e1pPITTPAsapIndex
e1pPITTPTimeSlotTMN

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar)

Table Entry
Configura
tion

Description

berMeasureElapsedTime
Radio port Ch#0
berMeasureSuspectIntervalFlag
berMeasureValue
berMeasureRowStatus
opticsIMPdhRAIInsertionTable All the 1+0 E1 Rx ports Ch#1
pdhRAIInsertionSignalType
pdhRAIInsertionStatus
E1 Tx ports Ch#1

Rx
ports
All the 1+1 E1
Ch#Common
E1
Tx
ports
Ch#Common

Indexes
Value
20100

1xx01;
e1pPI
(xx
01..32)
2xx01;
e1Path
(xx
01..32)
1xx99;
e1pPI
(xx
01..32)
2xx99;
e1Path
(xx
01..32)

opticsIMAlarmLinkIdentifierMismatc
hRaise
opticsIMAlarmLinkIdentifierMismatc
hClear
opticsIMTrsPdhMib
opticsIMFrameTTPTable
frameTTPOperationalState
opticsIMCoderTTPTable
coderTTPOperationalState

All the 1+0 Radio port Ch#1


All the 1+1 Radio
port
Ch#Common
All the 1+0 Radio port Ch#1
All the 1+1 Radio port Ch#1
Radio port Ch#0

20101
20199
20101
20101
20100

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

opticsIMFrameStructureConfigurati
on
opticsIMLinkExpectedMode
opticsIMLinkExpectedValue
opticsIMLinkSentValue

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

59/202

ETHERNET TRANSMISSION DOMAIN

6.1 Functional Description


This domain is significant only in case of Ethernet configurations. The Ethernet configurations are the
following:

1+0
1+1 HSB
1+1 FD

16E1/DS1-ETH
16E1/DS1-ETH
16E1/DS1-ETH

(PSU4860, PSU2460)
(PSU4860, PSU2460)
(PSU4860, PSU2460).

The DS1 signal is not supported.


In terms of Ethernet interface management, the ULS supports the following functional layers:

Ethernet Physical Interface Layer (MAU and ETY_T functional blocks, see [18])
Ethernet Port Layer (ETH and EFC functional blocks, see [20])

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Ethernet Physical Interface and Ethernet Port Layers


The Ethernet interfaces can be configured according to two different modalities: manual mode or
automatic mode (auto-negotiation is enabled, by default) by ifMauAutoNegAdminStatus object (see
new F-8.7p): these two modalities are valid only automatic mode for Gigabit Ethernet signals.
The ifMauAutoNegSupported object is set to true value.
In automatic mode a mechanism of auto-sensing (the auto-negotiation) of the parameters involved is
activated, these parameters are negotiated with the remote Ethernet interface.

auto-negotiation is always enabled only in case of Gigabit Ethernet signal;

the operator can plan one or a set of rates (10 and/or 100 and/or 1000 Mb/s) and to allow to
auto-negotiate them;

the directionality can be half or full-duplex (when the 10 and/or 100 Mb/s rates are chosen, the
directionality can be half or full duplex, when the 1000 Mb/s rate is chosen, the directionality is
always full-duplex);

when the auto-negotiation process fails or when the auto-negotiation parameters are changed,
the auto-negotiation restart command has to be performed in order to have new configured
parameters effective.

In manual mode, the ifMauTypeListBits object contains all the values for the rate and the
directionality allowed on the interface. The allowed values are:
b10baseTHD (10)
- rate 10 Mb/s half-duplex
b10baseTFD (11)
- rate 10 Mb/s full-duplex
b100baseTXHD (15)
- rate 100 Mb/s half-duplex
b100baseTXFD (16)
- rate 100 Mb/s full-duplex

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

60/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

The following items resume the features supported by ULS in terms of Gigabit Ethernet Physical
interface management:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

The rate, the directionality and the Flow control are configurable with the following values:
F-7.11 (ifMauDefaultType)
with a specific value selected on ifMauTypeListBits.
F-8.8p (opticsIMEthDefaultPause)
disabled (0)
Flow Control disabled
asymmetric-PAUSE (1),
asymmetric Flow Control enabled
In automatic mode, the ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits object contains all the values for the rate,
the directionality and the Flow control allowed on the interface. The allowed values are:
b10baseT (1)
- rate 10 Mb/s half-duplex
b10baseTFD (2)
- rate 10 Mb/s full-duplex
b100baseTX (4)
- rate 100 Mb/s half-duplex
b100baseTXFD (5)
- rate 100 Mb/s full-duplex
bFdxAPause (9)
- Asymmetric PAUSE for full-duplex links
b1000baseTFD (15)
- rate 1000 Mb/s full-duplex
The rate, the directionality and the Flow control are configurable with the following values:
F-8.3 (ifMauAutoNegCapAdvertisedBits) with a set of values selected
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits.

on

The auto-negotiation enabling (ifMauAutoNegAdminStatus set to true value) triggers the start of
the auto-negotiation process (to clarify, every time the auto-negotiation process is enabled (that is,
from manual to automatic mode), then the auto-negotiation is restarted automatically).
When the auto-negotiation process fails or when the auto-negotiation parameters are changed, the
auto-negotiation restart command has to be performed in order to have new configured parameters
effective (to clarify, first of all, the operator changes the parameters, pushes Apply button (the
parameters are not yet realized) and then, he has to push the Restart button to apply the parameters
really).

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

The ifMauType (F-7.12p) contains or the result of the auto-negotiation process or the value of the
object ifMauType in case the auto-negotiation is not enabled.

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

61/202

The QoS on Ethernet User ports is managed at NE level (for all Ethernet User port).
The QoS is always enabled.
The managing system is allowed to:
1. Assigning the specific queue on output port according to 802.1P priority bits on Ethernet packets
2. Assigning the specific queue on output port according to DiffServ priority bits on Ethernet packets
About the managing system:

the QoS is managed using a specific entry on opticsIMInFlowTable (with inFlowIndex = 1500)
and the inflowClassificationMode columnar object;

the managing system has to create the entry (F-2.x) with the parameters:
o
o

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Ethernet User ports QoS management

inflowIndex = 1500
classificationMode set to:
0 for 802.1P priority classification
1 for DiffServ priority classification

Ethernet Port Layer

the Pause function is allowed only when the capability is full-duplex;

the Pause function can be supported in automatic or manual mode;

the Ethernet Flow Control (EFC) can be enabled or disabled; when it is enabled, PAUSE function
can be symmetric and asymmetric (IEEE 802.3x); the supported asymmetric case is related to
allowed Pause at transmission side, no allowed Pause at receiver side;

in case of remote peer MAC layer without EFC feature, the overflow of the input queues causes to
discard any further received MAC frames: a correct frame received and discarded because of an
input queues overflow, is not counted as a received frame;

total transparency towards the IEEE 802.1Q (VLAN management will be supported in future);

Ethernet corrupted frames (Tx and Rx side independently) can be discarded or forwarded to the
addressed destination, according to the related SNMP manager request.

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

62/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

The following items resume the features supported by ULS in terms of Gigabit Ethernet Port layer
management:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1+1 with Hitless Configurations Functional View


Ethernet plug-in can be provisioned in all the 1+0 and 1+1 with hitless configurations.
Tx Functional View
Main/DATA
MAU
(sink)

ETH-EFC
(sink)

ODU

Main

ETH
(source)

Aggregate
(source)

MUX
(source)

Aggregate
(source)
Ext.

Radio
(source)

Radio
(source)

Ch#1

Ch#0

ODU

Rx Functional View
Main/DATA
MAU
(source)

ETH-EFC
(source)

ETH
(sink)

Aggregate
(sink)

DEMUX
(sink)

Aggregate
(sink)

RPS hitless

N.B.

ODU

Main

Ext.

MAU includes also the ETY_T functional block.

Radio
(sink)

Radio
(sink)

Ch#1

Ch#0

ODU

The mapping between the functional blocks indicated above and MIB tables is the following:

MAU
ETH-EFC, ETH

=>
=>

ifMauTable, ifMauAutoNegTable, opticsIMMauExtTable


opticsIMEthConfTable

Frame Structure Configuration with Ethernet interfaces

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

With the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces (100/1000 Base-T), the PDH transport capability is always less
than the maximum input bit rate, whereas in case of 10Base-T, the PDH transport capability can be
larger or smaller than the maximum input bit rate, according to the number of tributaries to be
transported.
Also when Ethernet signals have to be transported, the gross bit rate at the output of the Mux is
defined by the frame structure configuration (capacity) provided by the manager (i.e. 16xE1). Given a
gross bit rate, the following combinations of voice and data can be realized:

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

63/202

twoE1
fourE1
eightE1
sixteenE1
thirty-twoE1
oneE3
fourDS1
eightDS1
sixteenDS1
thirty-twoDS1
oneDS3

Number of
GE
4

(note
(note
(note
(note
(note
(note
(note

1)
1)
1)
1)
1)

1)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Frame Structure
Configuration
(Capacity)

Number of PDH
Tributaries

1 E1
3 E1
7 E1
7 or 15 E1
16 E1
Not allowed
3 DS1
7 DS1
7 or 15 DS1
16 DS1
Not allowed

2)

(note 1)
DS1, E3/DS3 signals are not supported.
(note 2)
The space reserved for the data transport is 51,184 Mbit/s, using also the remaining
inframe space (6,048 Mbit/s). not supported
ASAP Management
The severity of alarms addressed to instances of opticsIMEthConfTable is provided by the ASAP
configured for the associated instance (with the same ifIndex value for the line side instances, with the
same port identifier for the radio side instances) of the corresponding ifMauTable.
Automatic Link Shutdown

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

64/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

The F-8.4 (set) and F-8.5 (get) functions are supported in this release to shutdown the ethernet port;
the shutdown is really performed when one (or more) radio failure criteria happens; the default value
is the port shutdown is disabled.
This function is related to a single ethernet port; in our case, the four ethernet ports are linked to the
only radio port; when a criteria radio happens and the port shutdown is enabled, the behavior to
implement is that all the ethernet ports have to be put in shutdown.
When the radio criteria expires, then, all the four ethernet ports have to be enabled.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

6.2 Management Functions


The following table lists the Ethernet Transmission management functions supported in this release.
See [18] and [19].
6.2.1 Ethernet Physical Interface Management
Electrical Fast Ethernet MAU Management
Function
Activation/Deactivation
F-1.1 Request FE MAU
Status

F-1.6 Condition FE MAU


Status

F-1.7 Request FE MAU


Operational State

SN Function Description
MP
If
N This function is used to retrieve MAU object status with 2
admitted values depending of Activate state of the MAU:
Operational(3): the MAU is electrically switched on.
Shutdown(5): the MAU is electrically switched off.
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ifMauStatus
N This function is used to explicitly activate (ifMauStatus =
Operational) or deactivate (ifMauStatus = Shutdown) the
MAU.
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ifMauStatus
N This function is used to retrieve the MAU Operational State.
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ifMauMediaAvailable

Note F-1.7: Allowed values:

available (3)

notAvailable (4)
Function Configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-1.2 Request FE MAU


Jack Type

F-1.3 Condition FE MAU


Default Type

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
MP
If
N This function is used to request FE MAU jack type. FE MAU
always rely on rj45 (2) jack types.
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifJackTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ifJackType
N This function is used to operate on FE MAU default type:
dot3MauType10BaseTFD: 10BaseT full-duplex
dot3MauType100BaseTxFD: 100BaseTx full-duplex
This operation can be performed only when the
ifAdminStatus/ifMauStatus of supporting Ethernet interface is
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

65/202

Function Notification
F-1.5 Report FE MAU
Alarm

ED
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
MP
If
N This function is used to report a cLOS alarm.
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauTable
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP on opticsIMAlarmLossOfSignalRaise
SNMP-TRAP on opticsIMAlarmLossOfSignalClear

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

66/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel
1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

down.
By
default
the
100BaseTx
full-duplex
operation
(dot3MauType100BaseTxFD) is assumed.
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ifMauDefaultType
Note F-1.3: ifMauStatus is not currently included in ANNEX to Ethernet Physical Interface
Management Functional Specification.
F-1.4 Request FE MAU
N This function is used to request FE MAU capability data with
Capability Data
below retrieved information:
Whether auto-negotiation is supported;
The available MAU types (10BaseT/100BaseTX);
The actual default MAU type.
The available MAU types (see ifMauTypeListBits [2]) is defined
as:
b10baseTFD (11) = 1
b100baseTXFD (16) = 1
Other bits = 0
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
IfMauAutoNegSupported
IfMauTypeListBits
IfMauDefaultType
F-1.8 Change FE MAU
N This function is used to configure the ASAP Pointer associated
ASAP Pointer
to an Ethernet Interface.
Scope
OPTICSIM-ETHNE-MIB: opticsIMifMauExtTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMifMauExtAsapIndex
F-1.9 Request FE MAU
N This function is used to request the ASAP Pointer associated to
ASAP Pointer
an Ethernet Interface.
Scope
OPTICSIM-ETHNE-MIB: opticsIMifMauExtTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMifMauExtAsapIndex

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Electrical Fast Ethernet Ety_T Management


Function Configuration
F-2.1 Condition
Enabled/Disabled FE
Auto-Negotiation

F-2.2 Request FE MAU


Auto-Negotiation Status

F-2.3 Restart FE AutoNegotiation


ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
MP
If
N This function is used to enable (ifMauAutoNegAdminStatus =
enabled) or disable (ifMauAutoNegAdminStatus = disabled)
the auto-negotiation. This operation can be performed only
when the ifAdminStatus of supporting Ethernet interface is
down.
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauAutoNegTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ifMauAutoNegAdminStatus
N This function is used to request the MAU auto-negotiation
status. The retrieved informations are:
Whether or not the auto-negotiation is enabled
(ifMauAutoNegAdminStatus)
The current status of the auto-negotiation process
(ifMauAutoNegConfig)
The auto-negotiation capabilities supported by the local
(ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits)
The auto-negotiation capabilities advertised by the local
(ifMauAutoNegCapAdvertisedBits)
The auto-negotiation capabilities advertised by the remote
(ifMauAutoNegCapReceivedBits)

The available IfMauAutoNegCapabilityBits is defined by NE


as:
b10baseTFD (2) = 1
b100baseTXFD (5) = 1
bFdxPause(8) = 1 if Flow Control is supported (0
otherwise)
bFdxAPause(9) = 1 if Asymmetric Flow Control is
supported (0 otherwise)
bFdxSPause(10) = 0
bFdxBPause(11) = 0
Other bits = 0
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauAutoNegTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
ifMauAutoNegAdminStatus
ifMauAutoNegConfig
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
ifMauAutoNegCapAdvertisedBits
ifMauAutoNegCapReceivedBits
After the restart, the agent will reset the ifMauAutoNegRestart
to its default value: noRestart(2).
Scope
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

67/202

Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauAutoNegTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ifMauAutoNegCapAdvertisedBits

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

68/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-2.4 Condition FE MAU


Auto-Negotiation
Advertised Capability

MAU-MIB: ifMauAutoNegTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ifMauAutoNegRestart to restart(1)
This function is used to operate on the FE MAU capabilities
advertised during the auto-negotiation.
The FE mode operations:
Speed Negotiation: 10BASE-T full duplex mode,
b10baseTFD(2).
Speed Negotiation: 100BASE-TX full duplex mode,
b100baseTXFD(5).
Pause
operation:
PAUSE
for
full-duplex
links,
bFdxPause(8).
Pause operation: Asymmetric PAUSE for full-duplex links,
bFdxAPause(9).
Pause operation: Symmetric PAUSE for full-duplex links,
bFdxSPause(10).
Pause operation: Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE for
full-duplex links, bFdxBPause(11).
Advertised Capability Bits (IfMauAutoNegCapAdvertisedBits)
default values:
b10baseTFD(2) = 0.
b100baseTXFD(5) = 1.
bFdxPause(8)
=
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
corresponding bit value.
bFdxAPause(9)
=
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
corresponding bit value.
bFdxSPause(10)
=
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
corresponding bit value.
bFdxBPause(11)
=
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
corresponding bit value.
Other bits = 0.
Checks
No bit in IfMauAutoNegCapAdvertisedBits can be set to 1
if the corresponding bit in ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits is
0.
The manager should set to 1 either b10baseTFD(2) or
b100baseTXFD(5). That is, only one of speed negotiation
bits should be 1.
No PAUSE mode is configured by setting:
bFdxPause(8) = 0, bFdxAPause(9) = 0,
bFdxSPause(10) = 0, bFdxBPause(11) = 0.
Asymmetric PAUSE towards link partner is configured by
setting: bFdxPause(8) = 1, bFdxAPause(9) = 1,
bFdxSPause(10) = 0, bFdxBPause(11) = 0

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Note F-2.4: Bits settable to 1:


b10baseTFD(2)
b100baseTXFD(5)
The other bits assume the ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits corresponding bits values.
F-2.5 Request FE MAU
N This function is used to retrieve the FE Jabber State.
Jabber State
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ifMauJabberState
Optical Fast Ethernet MAU Management
Not supported.
Optical Fast Ethernet Ety_T Management
Not supported.
Gigabit Ethernet MAU Management
Function
Activation/Deactivation
F-7.1 Request Electrical
GE MAU Status

F-7.2 Condition
Electrical GE MAU
Status

F-7.3 Request Electrical


GE MAU Operational
State

S Function Description
N
M
PIf
Y This function is used to retrieve MAU object status with 2
admitted values depending of Activate state of the MAU:
Operational(3): the MAU is electrically switched on.
Shutdown(5): the MAU is electrically switched off.
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ifMauStatus
Y This function is used to explicitly activate (ifMauStatus =
Operational) or deactivate (ifMauStatus = Shutdown)
the MAU.
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ifMauStatus
Y This function is used to retrieve the MAU Operational State.
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ifMauMediaAvailable

Note F-7.3: Allowed values:


available (3)
notAvailable (4)

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function Configuration

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

S
N
M
PIf

Function Description

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

69/202

F-7.10 Condition
Electrical GE MAU
Default Type

F-7.11 Change
Electrical GE MAU
Default Type

F-7.5 Request Electrical


GE MAU Capability
Data

ED
WTD

01

It.01

This function is used to request Electrical GE MAU jack type.


GE MAU always relies on rj45 (2) jack types
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifJackTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on ifJackType
This function is used to operate on Electrical GE MAU
default type with below admitted values:
dot3MauType10BaseTHD: 10BaseT half-duplex
dot3MauType10BaseTFD: 10BaseT full-duplex
dot3MauType100BaseTxHD: 100BaseTx half-duplex
dot3MauType100BaseTxFD: 100BaseTx full-duplex
[default value]
This operation can be performed only when the
ifAdminStatus/ifMauStatus of supporting Ethernet interface is
down.
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ifMauDefaultType
This function is used to change Electrical GE MAU default
type with below admitted values:
dot3MauType10BaseTHD: 10BaseT half-duplex
dot3MauType10BaseTFD: 10BaseT full-duplex
dot3MauType100BaseTxHD: 100BaseTx half-duplex
dot3MauType100BaseTxFD: 100BaseT full-duplex
[default value]
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ifMauDefaultType
The retrieved information is:
enabled Auto-negotiation Status
the available MAU types
the actual default MAU type (IfMauDefaultType)
The available MAU types (see ifMauTypeListBits [4]) is
defined by NE as:
b10baseTHD(10) = 1 10BASE-T half duplex mode
b10baseTFD(11) = 1 10BASE-T full duplex mode
b100baseTXHD(15) = 1 100BASE-TX half duplex
mode
b100baseTXFD(16) = 1 100BASE-TX full duplex mode
Other bits = 0
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
ifMauAutoNegSupported
ifMauTypeListBits

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

70/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-7.4 Request Electrical


GE MAU Jack Type

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

ifMauDefaultType
Note F-7.5: The following values: b10baseTHD(10), b100baseTXHD(15) arent currently
included in ANNEX to Ethernet Physical Interface Management Functional Specification.
F-7.6 Change Electrical
Y This function is used to configure the ASAP Pointer
associated to an Ethernet Interface.
GE MAU ASAP Pointer
Scope
OPTICSIM-ETHNE-MIB: opticsIMifMauExtTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMifMauExtAsapIndex
F-7.7 Request Electrical
Y This function is used to request the ASAP Pointer associated
GE MAU ASAP Pointer
to an Ethernet Interface.
Scope
OPTICSIM-ETHNE-MIB: opticsIMifMauExtTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMifMauExtAsapIndex
F-7.12p Request
Y This function is used to request the operational type of the
Electrical GE MAU Type
MAU, as determined by either the result of the autonegotiation function or if the auto-negotiation is not enabled
or is not implemented for this MAU, by the value of the
object ifMauDefaultType.
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
ifMauType
Function Notification

F-7.8 Report Electrical


GE MAU Alarm

S
N
M
PIf
Y

Function Description

This function is used to report a cLOS alarm.


Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauTable
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP on opticsIMAlarmLossOfSignalRaise
SNMP-TRAP on opticsIMAlarmLossOfSignalClear
F-7.9 Report Electrical
N Scope
GE URU Alarm
TSDIM-SNMPNE-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP on opticsIMAlarmUruRaise
SNMP-TRAP on opticsIMAlarmUruClear
Gigabit Ethernet Ety_T Management

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function Configuration

S
N
M
PIf
F-8.1 Report Electrical Y
GE
MAU
AutoNegotiation Status
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

Function Description
This function is used to request the MAU auto-negotiation
status. The retrieved informations are:
Whether or not the auto-negotiation is enabled
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

71/202

Note F-8.1: The following values:


b10baseT (1),
b100baseTX(4),
and the statement bFdxSPause(11) = 1 if Symmetric and Asymmetric Flow Control are
supported (0 otherwise) arent currently included in ANNEX to Ethernet Physical Interface
Management Functional Specification; bFdxAPause(9) = 1 and bFdxSPause(10) = 1 are
mutually exclusive.
F-8.2 Restart Electrical Y
After
the
restart,
the
agent
will
reset
the
GE Auto-Negotiation
ifMauAutoNegRestart to its default value: noRestart(2).
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauAutoNegTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ifMauAutoNegRestart to restart(1)
F-8.3
Condition P
This function is used to operate on Electrical GE MAU
Electrical GE MAU Autocapabilities advertised during the auto-negotiation.

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

72/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel
1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

(ifMauAutoNegAdminStatus)
The current status of the auto-negotiation process
(ifMauAutoNegConfig)
The auto-negotiation capabilities supported by the local
(ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits)
The auto-negotiation capabilities advertised by the local
(ifMauAutoNegCapAdvertisedBits)
The auto-negotiation capabilities advertised by the
remote (ifMauAutoNegCapReceivedBits)
The available IfMauAutoNegCapabilityBits is defined by NE
as:
b10baseT (1) = 1
b10baseTFD (2) = 1
b100baseTX (4) = 1
b100baseTXFD (5) = 1
b1000baseTFD (15) = 1
bFdxPause(8) = 1 if Flow Control is supported (0
otherwise)
bFdxAPause(9) = 1 if only Asymmetric Flow Control is
supported (0 otherwise)
bFdxSPause(10) = 1 if Symmetric Flow Control is
supported (0 otherwise)
bFdxBPause(11) = 1 if Asymmetric and Symmetric Flow
Control are supported (0 otherwise)
Other bits = 0
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauAutoNegTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
ifMauAutoNegAdminStatus
ifMauAutoNegConfig
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
ifMauAutoNegCapAdvertisedBits
ifMauAutoNegCapReceivedBits

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Negotiation Advertised
Capability

The Electrical GE mode operations:


Speed Negotiation. Admitted values:
o 10BASE-T half duplex mode, b10baseT(1)
o 10BASE-T full duplex mode, b10baseTFD(2)
o 100BASE-TX half duplex mode, b100baseTX(4)
o 100BASE-TX full duplex mode, b100baseTXFD(5)
o 1000BASE-T full duplex mode,
b1000baseTFD(15) [Default Value]
Pause operation. Admitted values:
o PAUSE for full-duplex links, bFdxPause(8).
o Asymmetric PAUSE for full-duplex links,
bFdxAPause(9).
o Symmetric PAUSE for full-duplex links,
bFdxSPause(10).
o Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE for full-duplex
links, bFdxBPause(11).
Advertised Capability Bits (IfMauAutoNegCapAdvertisedBits)
default values:

b10baseT(1) = 0

b10baseTFD(2) = 0

b100baseTX(4) = 0

b100baseTXFD(5) = 0

b1000baseTFD(15) = 1

bFdxPause(8)
=
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
corresponding bit value.

bFdxAPause(9)
=
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
corresponding bit value.

bFdxSPause(10)
=
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
corresponding bit value.

bFdxBPause(11)
=
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
corresponding bit value.

Other bits = 0.
Checks

No bit in IfMauAutoNegCapAdvertisedBits can be set


to 1 if the corresponding bit in ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
is 0.

No PAUSE mode is configured by setting:


bFdxPause(8) = 0, bFdxAPause(9) = 0, bFdxSPause(10) =
0, bFdxBPause(11) = 0.

Asymmetric PAUSE towards link partner is


configured by setting: bFdxPause(8) = 1, bFdxAPause(9) =
1, bFdxSPause(10) = 0, bFdxBPause(11) = 0.

Symmetric PAUSE towards link partner is


configured by setting: bFdxPause(8) = 1, bFdxAPause(9) =
0, bFdxSPause(10) = 1, bFdxBPause(11) = 0.

Symmetric and Asymmetric PAUSE towards link


partner is configured by setting: bFdxPause(8) = 1,
bFdxAPause(9) = 0, bFdxSPause(10) = 0, bFdxBPause(11)
= 1.
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauAutoNegTable

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

73/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Service Used
SNMP-SET on IfMauAutoNegCapAdvertisedBits
Note F-8.3: In this MF, the management of the speeds in half-duplex mode and the checks of
Pause function have been modified, related to the ANNEX to Ethernet Physical Interface
Management Functional Specification.
Only Asymmetric PAUSE is supported: the bFdxSPause(10) and bFdxBPause(11) are always set
to 0 value.
F-8.6. Change Electrical N
This function is used to change Electrical GE MAU
GE MAU Autocapabilities advertised during the auto-negotiation. The
Electrical GE mode operations:
Negotiation Advertised
Speed Negotiation. Admitted values:
Capability
o 10BASE-T full duplex mode, b10baseTFD(2)
o 100BASE-TX full duplex mode, b100baseTXFD(5)
o 1000BASE-T full duplex mode,
b1000baseTFD(15). [Default Value]
Pause operation. Admitted values:
o PAUSE for full-duplex links, bFdxPause(8).
o Asymmetric PAUSE for full-duplex links,
bFdxAPause(9).
o Symmetric PAUSE for full-duplex links,
bFdxSPause(10).
Asymmetric and Symmetric PAUSE for full-duplex
links, bFdxBPause(11).
Advertised Capability Bits (IfMauAutoNegCapAdvertisedBits)
default values:

b10baseTFD(2) = 0

b100baseTXFD(5) = 0

b1000baseTFD(15) = 1

bFdxPause(8)
=
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
corresponding bit value.

bFdxAPause(9)
=
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
corresponding bit value.

bFdxSPause(10)
=
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
corresponding bit value.

bFdxBPause(11)
=
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
corresponding bit value.

Other bits = 0.
Checks

No bit in IfMauAutoNegCapAdvertisedBits can be set


to 1 if the corresponding bit in ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
is 0.

The manager should set to 1 one of below 3 values:


b10baseTFD(2) or b100baseTXFD(5) or b1000baseTFD(15).
That is, only one of speed negotiation bits should be 1;

No PAUSE mode is configured by setting:


bFdxPause(8) = 0, bFdxAPause(9) = 0, bFdxSPause(10) =
0, bFdxBPause(11) = 0.

Asymmetric PAUSE towards link partner is


ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

74/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

configured by setting: bFdxPause(8) = 1, bFdxAPause(9) =


1, bFdxSPause(10) = 0, bFdxBPause(11) = 0.
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauAutoNegTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on IfMauAutoNegCapAdvertisedBits
F-8.4. Change Remote
Y
Scope
OPTICSIM-ETHNE-MIB: opticsIMEthConfExtTable
Client Fail Electrical GE
MAU consequent action
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMEthConfExtRemCsfMAUAction with
below values:
disabled (0) [default value]
transmitter_shutdown (1)
F-8.5. Request Remote
Y
Scope
Client Fail Electrical GE
OPTICSIM-ETHNE-MIB : opticsIMEthConfExtTable
Service Used
MAU consequent action
SNMP-GET on opticsIMEthConfExtRemCsfMAUAction
F-8.7p. Condition
Y
This function is used to enable (ifMauAutoNegAdminStatus
Electrical GE MAU Auto= enabled) or disable (ifMauAutoNegAdminStatus =
Negotiation
disabled) the auto-negotiation. This operation can be
performed only when the ifAdminStatus of supporting
Ethernet interface is down.
Scope
MAU-MIB: ifMauAutoNegTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ifMauAutoNegAdminStatus
F-8.8p. Condition
P
This function is used to enable the PAUSE function when the
PAUSE function for
auto-negotiation is disabled (manual mode). If the autoElectrical GE MAU with
negotiation is not enabled (or is not implemented for this
auto-negotiation
MAU), the value of this object (opticsIMEthDefaultPause)
disabled
determines the operational type of the Flow Control. A set
operation on this object will force the Flow Control into the
specified operating mode.
Scope
OPTICSIM-ETHNE-MIB: opticsIMEthConfTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMEthDefaultPause
Note F-8.8p: symmetric-PAUSE (2) value for opticsIMEthDefaultPause is not supported.
F-8.9p. Request PAUSE
Y
This function is used to request the PAUSE function status
when the auto-negotiation is disabled (manual mode).
function for Electrical
GE MAU with autoScope
negotiation disabled
OPTICSIM-ETHNE-MIB: opticsIMEthConfTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMEthDefaultPause

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

6.2.2 Ethernet Port Management


Local Ethernet Port Transmission Specification Ety/Eth_A Management
Function
Creation/Deletion
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
MP
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

75/202

F-1.x All the functions

SN Function Description
MP
If
N

Function Configuration

SN Function Description
MP
If
F-1.6 Condition Ety/Eth_A N This function is used to configure Promiscuous mode when the
Promiscuous Mode
Ethernet interface is deactivated.
Scope
IF-MIB: ifXTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ifPromiscuousMode to below values:
true(1) when the station accepts all packets/frames
transmitted on the media.
false(2) if this interface only accepts packets/frames that
are addressed to this station.
F-1.7 Request Ety/Eth_A
P This function is used to read:
Data
the interface MTU;
the interface speed;
the interface mode (promiscuous/not promiscuous);
the Ethernet local MAC address. In case the local MAC
address is not available the address will have the value
00:00:00:00:00:00;
the handling (over local Ethernet port) of incoming errored
Ethernet frames;
Client Layer of an ISA NE local Ethernet Port
Scope
IF-MIB: ifTable, ifXTable, opticsIMEthConfTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
ifType
ifMtu
ifPromiscuousMode
ifPhysAddress
ifConnectorPresent (set to true)
opticsIMEthFCSDiscardErroredFrames
opticsIMEthClientType
Note F-1.7: Only object opticsIMEthFCSDiscardErroredFrames is supported.
F-1.8 Condition Ety/Eth_A N This function allows to condition the handling of incoming
errored Ethernet frames over local Ethernet port complying
FCS Discard Errored
with 2 possible modes:
Frames
Monitoring and discarding handling mode of incoming
errored Ethernet frames [Default Handling Mode];
Monitoring handling mode of incoming Ethernet errored
ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

76/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function
Activation/Deactivation

If
N

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-1.x All the functions

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-1.9 Condition Ety/Eth_A


Ethernet Port Client Type

frames.
Scope
OPTICSIM-ETHNE-MIB: opticsIMEthConfTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMEthFCSDiscardErroredFrames
This function allows to condition the Client Layer of an ISA NE
local Ethernet Port in case of promiscuous mode complying
with below possible modes:
ETS Layer mode; [Default Mode is ISA NE Product Specific]
OR
Ethernet Switching Layer.
Scope
OPTICSIM-ETHNE-MIB: opticsIMEthConfTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMEthClientType

Local Ethernet Port Transmission Specification EFC Management


Function Configuration
F-6.x All the functions

SN Function Description
MP
If
N

Remote Ethernet Port Transmission Specification GFP/Eth_A Management


Function
Creation/Deletion
F-3.x All the functions

Function
Activation/Deactivation
F-3.x All the functions
Function Configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-3.5 Request Gfp/Eth_A


Ethernet Interface Status

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
MP
If
N

SN Function Description
MP
If
N
SN Function Description
MP
If
N This function is used to read:
the status of an Ethernet Interface (enabled/disabled)
The operational state of an Ethernet interface (up/down)
The time at which the interface entered its current
operational state.
Scope
IF-MIB: ifTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
ifAdminStatus
ifOperStatus
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

77/202

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

78/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel
1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

ifLastChange
F-3.6 Condition
N This function is used to configure Promiscuous mode when the
Gfp/Eth_A Promiscuous
Ethernet interface is deactivated.
Mode
Scope
IF-MIB: ifXTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on ifPromiscuousMode
F-3.7 Request Gfp/Eth_A
P This function is used to read:
Ethernet Configuration
interface MTU;
Data
interface speed;
The interface mode (promiscuous/not promiscuous);
The Ethernet local MAC address (ifPhysAddress). In case
the local MAC address is not available the address will
have the value 00:00:00:00:00:00;
the handling of incoming errored Ethernet frames over a
GFP-based remote Ethernet Port:
Monitoring and discarding handling mode is the unique
supported handling mode to be retrieved from ISA NE;
Client Layer of an ISA NE GFP-based remote
Ethernet Port.
Scope
IF-MIB: ifTable, ifXTable
OPTICSIM-ETHNE-MIB: opticsIMEthConfTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
ifType
ifMtu
ifPromiscuousMode
ifPhysAddress
ifConnectorPresent (fixed to FALSE)
opticsIMEthFCSDiscardErroredFrames
opticsIMEthClientType
Note F-3.7: Only object opticsIMEthFCSDiscardErroredFrames is supported.
F-3.8 Condition
N This function allows to condition the handling of incoming
Gfp/Eth_A FCS Discard
errored Ethernet frames over a GFP-based remote Ethernet
Errored Frames
Port complying with 2 possible modes:
Monitoring and discarding handling mode of incoming
errored Ethernet frames [Default Handling Mode is ISA NE
Product Specific];
Monitoring handling mode of incoming Ethernet errored
frames.
Scope
OPTICSIM-ETHNE-MIB: opticsIMEthConfTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMEthFCSDiscardErroredFrames
F-3.9 Condition
N This function allows to condition the Client Layer of an ISA NE
GFP-based remote Ethernet Port (in promiscuous mode)
Gfp/Eth_A Ethernet Port
complying with below possible modes:
Client Type
ETS Layer mode; [Default Mode] OR

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Ethernet Switching Layer.


Scope
OPTICSIM-ETHNE-MIB: opticsIMEthConfTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMEthClientType columnar object
Remote Ethernet Port Transmission Specification GFPpr/Eth_A Management
Not supported.
Remote Ethernet Port Transmission Specification LAPS/Eth_A Management
Not supported.
Ethernet MAC Termination Transmission Specification Eth_T Management
Function Configuration
F-2.1 Condition Ethernet
LLC/MAC Framing

F-2.2 Request Ethernet


LLC/MAC Framing

SN Function Description
MP
If
N This function is used to condition the Ethernet framing used in
transmission. The possible framing types
are:
Ethernet V2;
LLC/SNAP;
802.2/802.3.
Scope
OPTICSIM-ETHNE-MIB: opticsIMEthConfTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMEthConfEncaps
N This function is used to read the Ethernet framing used in
transmission. The possible framing types are:
Ethernet V2;
LLC/SNAP;
802.2/802.3.
Scope
OPTICSIM-ETHNE-MIB: opticsIMEthConfTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMEthConfEncaps

6.2.3 Ethernet Transport Service Management


Ethernet ETS InFlow ETC/ETS_A_Sk Management

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function
Creation/Deletion

SN Function Description
MP
If
F-2.1 Create Ethernet ETS N Scope:
OpticsIMETS-MIB: opticsIMETSInFlowTable,
InFlow
opticsIMETSInFlowIndexNext.
Services Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMETSInFlowIndexNext.
SNMP-SET on:
_ opticsIMETSInFlowRowStatus to createAndWait value
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

79/202

F-2.x Create/Activate
Ethernet ETS InFlow

Index
opticsIMETSInFlowIndex set to opticsIMETSInFlowIndexNext.
Checks
IfAdminStatus of associated underlying hecks t interface
is requested to be up, and ethernet interface is
requested to be provisioned on promiscuous mode.
ifType is requested to be verified equal either to 6
(Ethernet-csmacd) or to 161 (ieee802adLag);

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

80/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-2.2 Delete Ethernet ETS


InFlow

_ opticsIMETSInFlowServiceType to ethernet value


_ opticsIMETSInFlowServiceID to index value of the associated
either ethernetEthernet or LAG
port
Index
opticsIMETSInFlowIndex set to opticsIMETSInFlowIndexNext.
Checks
IfAdminStatus of associated underlying ethernet interface
is requested to be up, and ethernet interface
is requested to be provisioned on promiscuous mode.
ifType is requested to be verified equal either to 6
(Ethernet-csmacd) or to 161 (ieee8023adLag);
ifPromiscuousMode is requested to be verified equal to
true value;
ifAdminStatus is requested to be verified equal to up.
Scope:
OpticsIMETS-MIB: opticsIMETSInFlowTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMETSInFlowRowStatus to destroy value.
Index
opticsIMETSInFlowIndex
Checks
All Classifier Criterias related to this ETS InFlow have been
already deleted.
Setting
This management function takes as effect the unbind of
opticsIMETSInFlowColorProfilePointer if
opticsIMETSInFlowColorProfilePointer is set with a non-zero
value.
Scope:
OpticsIMETS-MIB: opticsIMETSInFlowTable,
opticsIMETSInFlowIndexNext.
Services Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMETSInFlowIndexNext.
SNMP-SET on:
_ opticsIMETSInFlowRowStatus to createAndGo value
_ opticsIMETSInFlowServiceType to ethernet value
_ opticsIMETSInFlowServiceID to index value of the associated
either Ethernet or LAG port
_ opticsIMETSInFlowClassificationMode

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

ifPromiscuousMode is requested to be verified equal to


true value;
ifAdminStatus is requested to be verified equal to up.
Note F-2.x: This function is used to manage InFlow for two different purposes:
QoS for User Ethernet port at NE level (just one entry for all the Ethernet ports). In this case
just the ClassificationMode object is used.
The following are not supported:
opticsIMETSInFlowServiceType to ethernet value
opticsIMETSInFlowServiceID to index value of the associated either Ethernet or LAG port.
Function
Activation/deactivation
F-2.x
Function Configuratin
F-2.x
Function Properties
F-2.x

SN Function Description
MP
If
N Not supported
SN Function Description
MP
If
N Not supported
SN Function Description
MP
If
N Not supported

6.3 Supported Objects and Naming Rules


The SNMP tables (with the columnar objects) and the scalar objects supported by this release are
provided in the following table.
For each table the indexes values of all the supported entries are provided too.
The general naming rules for the Ethernet objects are defined in [17].
Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar)

Table Entry
Configuration

Description

Indexes
Value

mauMod (from MAU-MIB)

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

ifMauTable
ifMauStatus
ifMauType
(note 1)
ifMauMediaAvailable
ifMauDefaultType
ifMauAutoNegSupported
ifMauTypeListBits

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

All the 1+0 ETH


All the 1+1 ETH

DATA Tx user ports 1xx01; 1


Ch#1
(xx = 33..36
for GE)

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

81/202

Table Entry
Configuration

ifMauAutoNegTable
All the 1+0 ETH
ifMauAutoNegAdminStatus
All the 1+1 ETH
ifMauAutoNegConfig
ifMauAutoNegCapabilityBits
ifMauAutoNegCapAdvertisedBit
s
ifMauAutoNegCapReceivedBits
ifMauAutoNegRestart

Indexes
Value
DATA Tx user ports 1xx01; 1
Ch#1
(xx = 33..36
for GE)
Description

opticsIMEthNEMib
opticsIMifMauExtTable
opticsIMifMauExtAsapIndex

All the 1+0 ETH


All the 1+1 ETH

opticsIMEthConfTable
opticsIMEthDefaultPause

All the 1+0 ETH


All the 1+1 ETH

opticsIMEthConfExtTable
All the 1+0 ETH
opticsIMEthConfExtRemCsfMAU All the 1+1 ETH
Action
opticsimETSMib
opticsIMETSInFlowTable
All the 1+0 ETH
opticsIMETSInFlowServiceType
All the 1+1 ETH
opticsIMETSInFlowClassification
Mode

ED
WTD

01

User Ethernet ports


(for NE QoS)

1500

This object is supported only with Gigabit Ethernet signals.


The Pause function is not supported at radio side; the object is supported only for

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

82/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

(note 1)
(note 2)
alarms.

DATA Tx user ports 1xx01; 1


Ch#1
(xx = 33..36
for GE)
DATA Tx user ports 1xx01
Ch#1
(xx = 33..36
for GE)
DATA Rx radio ports 29901
Ch#1
(note 2)
DATA Tx user ports 1xx01
Ch#1
(xx = 33..36
for GE)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

RADIO DOMAIN

7.1 Functional Description


Radio Protections
One RPS hitless protection scheme is supported in case of 1+1 configurations.
The following table defines the characteristics of the RPS protection scheme.
Parameter Type
Protection Group Type
Switching Type
Restoration Criteria
Switching Condition
Priority
Operator Commands

(note 1)

Value
1+1 hitless
Single Ended
Revertive/Non Revertive
Signal Fail, HBER, EW (note 1)
Not Applicable
Lockout spare
Forced switch from main to spare
Manual switch from main to spare and viceversa

Signal Fail and HBER switching criteria have the same priority.

If an EPS Lockout spare command is active, all RPS protection scheme functionality are disabled. In
this case the Ch#1 is the channel active both for EPS and RPS protection schemes independently to
RPS command active.
As a single, common RPS local switching function is supported, the management of the rx static delay
is performed at NE level and not for each radio channel. In case of EW switching conditions, the
switch is performed only if the two signals are aligned. The alignment condition is not necessary in
case of SF and HBER.
The delays to be inserted by a manual management of the rx static delay
(opticsIMRadioManRxStaticDelayDirectWay and opticsIMRadioManRxStaticDelayIndirectWay columnar
objects) must be included in the 0..31 range. The alignement is performed inserting a delay only in
one signal. Fot this reason, for each alignment command (F-1.74) only one delay (direct or indirect
way) different from 0 value has to be specified; the delay of the other way must be set to 0 value.
One TPS protection scheme is supported in case of 1+1 HSB configurations (except in 1+1 with EPS
MUX disabled).

The following table defines the characteristics of the TPS protection scheme.

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Parameter Type
Protection Group Type
Switching Type
Restoration Criteria
Switching Condition
Operator Commands

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

Value
1+1
Single Ended
Revertive / Non Revertive
Equipment failures Tx side
Lockout spare
Forced switch from main to spare
Manual switch from main to spare and viceversa
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

83/202

Modulation
The modulation has to be considered a system parameter.
It must be configured (4 or 16 QAM) by the managing system with the same value on both the radio
channels independently from the radio configuration and the ODU type. This is true also in case of
1+1 radio mixed configurations with different ODU types.
When a managing system configures the modulation (by F-3.3), it addresses the associated request to
a specific radio channel, but the agent implicitly applies this configuration request not only to the
radio channel addressed by the request, but also to the other one.
Restrictions:
16 QAM modulation cannot be associated to 2E1 frame structure configurations for any ODU
type and to 4E1 frame structure for ODU v2 4/16 QAM.
The allowed modulations are defined by a software key (Flash Card type).

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

The configuration of both these protection schemes is performed by the NE in conjunction with the
equipment provisioning process (declaration of boards).

The following table shows the allowed modulation values and frame structure configuration values
supported by each ODU type.
Modulation

ODU type description


ODU v1 32Mb 4/16QAM
ODU v1 64Mb 4/16QAM
ODU v2 32Mb 4QAM
ODU v2 64Mb 4/16QAM

4QAM

16QAM

2E1, 4E1, 8E1, 16E1


2E1, 4E1, 8E1, 16E1
2E1, 4E1, 8E1, 16E1
2E1, 4E1, 8E1, 16E1

4E1, 8E1, 16E1


4E1, 8E1, 16E1, 32E1
-8E1, 16E1, 32E1

An IncompatibleModulation alarm is raised when an ODU receives a modulation value not


supported.
An IncompatibleCapacity alarm is raised when an ODU receives a frame structure configuration
value not supported.
In case the conditions for both alarm exist, then only IncompatibleModulation is raised.
Tx Mute
Tx Mute function is managed on radio link basis. Activation/deactivation requests of the Tx squelch
are addressed to a given NE (the local NE) and channel. According to the request, the command is
applied on the local or on the remote NE.

In 1+1 HSB configurations some radio transmission parameters must be configured with the same
values on both the radio channels. This assures that a transmission protection switch doesnt affect the
radio transmission.
This behaviour is obtained in the following way:
ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

84/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Radio transmission parameters in 1+1 HSB configuration

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

when a managing system configures one of the radio transmission parameters it addresses the
associated request to a specific radio channel
when the agent receives the request, implicitly, applies this configuration request not only to the
radio channel addressed by the request but also to the other one.
Radio transmission parameters managed in 1+1 HSB configurations according to this behaviour are
described in the following table:
Parameter
Radio Frequency
Tx Mute (Local/Remote)

SNMP Table
opticsIMRadioFrequencyTable
opticsIMRadioTxMuteTable

SNMP Object
radioTxFrequency
opticsIMRadioManLocalTxMute
opticsIMRadioManRemoteTxMute

The ATPC parameters and the transmitted power (when the ATPC is disabled) have to be managed for
single channel.
Frequency Shifter Management
The configuration of radio Tx frequency and radio Rx frequency is done by setting the radio Tx
frequency within a Tx frequency range allowed.
The NE automatically calculates the Rx frequency based on a shifter value (specific for the diplexer
installed on ODU).
Each ODU can manage only one shifter (fixed shifter) or a list of predefined shifter (flexible shifter),
but, due to the inability to read the shifter information from the diplexer Remote Inventory, the shifter
value (and the central frequency) to use in case of flexible shifter management is choosen by
managing system in a list of allowed shifter value and central frequency.
This list is known on ODU based on frequency band (read from Remote Inventory).
When the ODU is physically connected to IDU, the list can be known also on IDU and the
OpticsIMAllowedShifterEntry are created, one entry for each shifter parameter allowed related to a
radio channel on a radio direction.
Also in case of fixed shifter the list is managed (with only one entry) to allow shifter management
independent from ODU type.
The managing system chooses the shifter value to use setting the radioShifterId object on
opticsIMRadioShifterTable with the index value (allowedShifterId object index) of one entry of the
opticsIMAllowedShifterTable (F-1.141).
Instead, when the ODU is not physically connected to IDU, in case of first configuration
(commissioning phase) the managing system is allowed to provide the values for radioShifter and the
radioCentralFrequency objects without any constraint on opticsIMAllowedShifterTable.
In this case, to provide the radioShifter value, the (F-1.141) is used with the following:
radioShifterId = radioShifter + 10000.
To provide the radioCentralFrequency value, the (F-1.8) is used with the following:
radioMinRxFrequency = radioCentralFrequency.

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Based on frequency sub-band read from Remote Inventory and on Channel Spacing (configured by
managing system on radio capacity/modulation setting), the Tx frequency range is reported to allow
the radio TX frequency setting.
Rx frequency is calculated automatically by the NE using Tx frequency configured by the managing
system and the shifter value (fixed or configured by the managing system).
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

85/202

To resume: the configuration of frequency parameters of a radio channel is done by setting in a first
time the shifter value (by managing system for flexible shifter and the only value for fixed shifter) and
then the Tx frequency (and eventually the Rx frequency).
There are no default values for shifter value and Tx and Rx frequency values.
Shifter value and Tx frequency have to be explicitly configured by managing system, while Rx
frequency is automatically calculated.
Its applied a default value (7.000.000-40.000.000 KHz or maximum hardware range known by
ODU) for Tx frequency range to allow to configure in one shot all frequency parameters.
The configuration of shifter value-central frequency is allowed only on local station (during the
installaton phase), thats allowed only to managers declared as localct in the related
MgrPollingManagerType object of the polling table.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

In few cases, the Rx frequency can be modified by the managing inside the Rx frequency range
associated to couple shifter value-central frequency configured.
Thats just the same of the use a new shifter value not included in the predefined list.

An IncompatibleFrequency alarm is raised in the following cases:


when it has been configured a txFrequency value not included on the allowed Tx Frequency
Range;
when it has been configured a rxFrequency value not included on the allowed Rx Frequency
Range;
when, on configuring a new shifter value, the txFrequency is no longer included on the new
allowed txFrequencyRange.
An IncompatibleShifter alarm is raised in the following cases:
when it has been configured a shifter value not supported by ODU installed (not included in
the allowed list supported by ODU).
Tx Power Management

ED
WTD

The incompatiblePTx alarm is cleared (if it is raised) on ODU in the following cases:

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

86/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

An IncompatiblePTX alarm is raised on ODU in the following cases:


when its configured a txPower value not included on the allowed Tx Power Range. Thats
could happen:
o on configuring an txPower (SNMP-SET on radioCurrentTxPower by F-1.20
management function) not included on the allowed power range even if a Tx Power
value is forced on ODU side due to traffic impact. The IDU sends to ODU a SET-PTX
request;
o on configuring a new modulation type value (SNMP-SET on radioPDHTTPModulation
by F-3.3 management function) sent to ODU by a SET-Modulation and a SET-PTX
requests. On ODU the alarm is raised if the txPower (specified on the SET-PTX request)
is no longer included on the new allowed power range because the change of
modulation value causes a change of power range (known at ODU side) and even if a
Tx Power value is forced on ODU side due to traffic impact;

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

on configuring an txPower (SNMP-SET on radioCurrentTxPower by F-1.20


management function) included on the allowed Power range. The IDU sends to ODU a
SET-PTX request;
on configuring a new modulation type value (SNMP-SET on radioPDHTTPModulation
by F-3.3 management function) sent to ODU by a SET-Modulation and a SET-PTX
requests. On ODU the alarm is cleared if the txPower (specified on the SET-PTX
request) is now included on the new allowed power range because the change of
modulation value causes a change of power range (known at ODU side).

7.2 Management Functions


The following table lists the Radio management functions supported in this release (see [12]).
Radio Frequency
Function Configuration
F-1.1 Request Tx Radio
Frequency

F-1.2 Condition Tx Radio


Frequency

F-1.3 Request Rx Radio


Frequency

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-1.4 Request Tx Radio


Frequency Range

F-1.5 Condition Tx Radio


ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
MP
If
Y This management function allows the managing system to
request the transmission radio frequency expressed in KHz.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioFrequencyTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioTxFrequency
Y This management function allows the managing system to
condition the transmission radio frequency expressed in KHz.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioFrequencyTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on radioTxFrequency
Y This management function allows the managing system to
request the receive radio frequency expressed in KHz.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioFrequencyTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioRxFrequency
Y This management function allows the managing system to
request the minimum and maximum values allowed for the
transmission radio frequency, they are expressed in KHz.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioFrequencyTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
radioMinTxFrequency
radioMaxTxFrequency
N This management function allows the managing system to
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

87/202

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

88/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

condition the minimum and maximum values allowed for the


transmission radio frequency, they are expressed in KHz.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioFrequencyTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on:
radioMinTxFrequency
radioMaxTxFrequency
F-1.6 Condition Rx Radio
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Frequency
condition the receive radio frequency expressed in KHz.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioFrequencyTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on radioRxFrequency
F-1.7 Request Rx Radio
P This management function allows the managing system to
Frequency Range
request the minimum and maximum values allowed for the
receive radio frequency, they are expressed in KHz.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioFrequencyTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
radioMinRxFrequency
radioMaxRxFrequency
F-1.8 Condition Rx Radio
P This management function allows the managing system to
Frequency Range
condition the minimum and maximum values allowed for the
receive radio frequency, they are expressed in KHz.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioFrequencyTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on:
radioMinRxFrequency
radioMaxRxFrequency
Note F-1.7 and F-1.8: these MFs are used only for the shifter management (in order to provide
central frequency value), with a different meaning regarding to his described goal. Furthermore,
they are partially supported, because only the radioMinRxFrequency set has to be implemented.
F-1.9 Request Return
N This management function allows the managing system to
Code on Radio Frequency
check if Set operation on radio frequency is successful. If the
setting
Get operation returns a value different than setNoError, then
the Set operation on radio frequency is unsuccessful and this
value stays until a new Set operation on radio frequency is
performed. Otherwise, if the Get operation returns
setNoError, the above Set operation on radio frequency is
successful.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Frequency Range

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

opticsIMRadioFrequencyTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioReturnCodeFrequency
Tx Power and ATPC
Function Configuration

SN Function Description
MP
If
F-1.10 Request ATPC
N This management function allows the managing system to
Implemented Status
request if the ATPC capability is present or not.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMRadioAtpcImplemented
F-1.11 Request ATPC
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Activity
request the status of the ATPC activity: enabled or disabled.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioAtpcEnabled
F-1.12 Condition ATPC
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Activity
condition the status of the ATPC activity: enabled or disabled.
ATPC can be enabled only if it is implemented in the
equipment.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on radioAtpcEnabled
F-1.13 Request ATPC Tx
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Range
request the minimum and maximum values allowed for the
transmitted power used by ATPC device.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
radioMinAtpcTxPower
radioMaxAtpcTxPower
F-1.14 Condition ATPC Tx Y This management function allows the managing system to
Range
condition the minimum and maximum values allowed for the
transmitted power used by ATPC device.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on:
radioMinAtpcTxPower
radioMaxAtpcTxPower
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

89/202

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

90/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel
1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Note F-1.14:The ATPC working range is set within the allowed ATPC range (F-1.29).
F-1.15 Request ATPC Rx
P This management function allows the managing system to
Power Thresholds
request the low and extra low power thresholds values used by
the ATPC device.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
radioAtpcLowPowerThr
radioAtpcExtraLowPowerThr
Note F-1.15: Only radioAtpcLowPowerThr is supported.
F-1.16 Condition ATPC Rx Y This management function allows the managing system to set
Low Power Threshold
the low power threshold value used by the ATPC device. This
value must be included in the related allowed range.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on radioAtpcLowPowerThr
F-1.17 Request ATPC Low Y This management function allows the managing system to
Power Threshold Range
request the minimum and maximum values allowed for the
low power threshold value used by ATPC device.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
radioAtpcLowPowerMinThr
radioAtpcLowPowerMaxThr
F-1.18 Request Tx
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Nominal Power
request the tx nominal power.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioTxNominalPower
F-1.19 Request Current
Y This management function allows the managing system to
request the value of the transmitted power when the ATPC is
Tx Power
disabled and no manual operation on transmitted power is
active.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioCurrentTxPower
F-1.20 Condition Current
Y This management function allows the managing system to set
Tx Power
the value of the transmitted power to be used by the local
transmitter when the ATPC is disabled and no manual

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-1.21 Request Tx Power


Range

F-1.22 Request Manual


Operation Status on Tx
Power

F-1.23 Initiate/Terminate
a Manual Operation on
Tx Power

F-1.24 Request Manual


Operation Tx Power
Level

F-1.25 Condition Manual


Operation Tx Power
Level

F-1.26 Request Atpc


Direction Identifier

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

operation on transmitted power is active.


Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on radioCurrentTxPower
This management function allows the managing system to
request the allowed range (minimum and maximum values) of
the transmitted power.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
radioMinTxPower
radioMaxTxPower
This management function allows the managing system to
request the status (active/not active) of a manual management
of the transmitted power.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioManOpTxPower
This management function allows the managing system to
initiate / terminate a manual management of the transmitted
power.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on radioManOpTxPower
This management function allows the managing system to
request the transmitted power level when a manual
management of the transmitted power is active.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioManOpTxPowerLevel
This management function allows the managing system to set
the transmitted power level when a manual management of
the transmitted power is active.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on radioManOpTxPowerLevel
This management function allows the managing system to
request the ATPC direction identifier used in the equipment
configurations in which all the radio channels transmit in the
same direction.
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

91/202

F-1.29 Request Allowed


ATPC Tx Range

F-1.48 Request ATPC


High Power Status

F-1.49 Condition ATPC in


High Power Mode

F-1.137 Condition ATPC


enabled with timeout

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

92/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-1.27 Condition Atpc


Direction Identifier

Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMRadioAtpcDirectionId
This management function allows the managing system to
condition the ATPC direction identifier used in the equipment
configurations in which all the radio channels transmit in the
same direction. The identifier provided is used both as
expected value (sink side) and as transmitted one (source
side).
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioAtpcDirectionId
This management function allows the managing system to
request the minimum and maximum values allowed for the
ATPC device when allowed ATPC range and allowed RTPC
range are different (see F-1.21).
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
radioMinAllowedAtpcTxPower
radioMaxAllowedAtpcTxPower
This management function allows the managing system to
request the status of the ATPC in high-power mode.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioATPCHighPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
radioATPCHighPowerMode
radioATPCHighPowerTimeout
radioATPCHighPowerTimeoutEnabled
This management function allows the managing system to
lock the ATPC in high-power mode.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioATPCHighPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on radioATPCHighPowerMode
This management function allows the managing system to
enable or to disable the ATPC with timeout.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioATPCHighPowerTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on radioATPCHighPowerTimeoutEnabled

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function Notifications
F-1.28 Report ATPC
Identifier Mismatch
Alarm

Intrusive Tx Power Control


Function
F-1.110 Request Radio
Channel Number

F-1.111 Request
Intrusive Near End Tx
Power Range

F-1.112 Request
Intrusive Far End Tx
Power Range

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

SN Function Description
MP
If
N This management function allows a managed system to report
an ATPC Identifier Mismatch alarm.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioAtpcDirectionId
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP:
opticsIMAlarmAtpcIdentifierMismatchRaise
opticsIMAlarmAtpcIdentifierMismatchClear

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
MP
If
N This management function allows a managing system to
request the number of the radio channel associated to the
information related to the management of the transmitted
power during an Intrusive BER measurement.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMIntrusiveTPCTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on intrusiveTPCRadioChannelNumber
N This management function allows the managing system to
request the minimum and maximum levels of the transmitted
power allowed during an Intrusive BER measurement activated
on the Far End NE.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMIntrusiveTPCTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
intrusiveTPCNearEndMinTxPower
intrusiveTPCNearEndMaxTxPower
N This management function allows the managing system to
request the minimum and maximum levels of the transmitted
power allowed on the corresponding Far End radio channel
during a BER measurement activated on the Near End NE.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMIntrusiveTPCTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
intrusiveTPCFarEndMinTxPower
intrusiveTPCFarEndMaxTxPower
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

93/202

F-1.114
Initiate/Terminate a
Manual Operation on
Far End Tx Power

F-1.115 Request Manual


Operation Tx Power
Level

F-1.116 Condition
Manual Operation Tx
Power Level

This management function allows the CT physically connected


to Near End NE to request the status of the control of the
transmitted power of the corresponding Far End radio channel
(TRUE if the it is controlled by the CT, FALSE otherwise).
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMIntrusiveTPCTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on intrusiveTPCFarEndControlled
This management function allows the CT physically connected
to Near End NE to assume the complete control of the
transmitted power of the corresponding Far End radio
channel.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMIntrusiveTPCTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on intrusiveTPCFarEndControlled
This management function allows the managing system to
request the transmitted power level used by the corresponding
Far End radio channel when an intrusive BER measurement is
active.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMIntrusiveTPCTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on intrusiveTPCFarEndManOpTxPowerLevel
This management function allows the managing system to set
the transmitted power level used by the corresponding Far
End radio channel when an intrusive BER measurement is
active.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMIntrusiveTPCTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on intrusiveTPCFarEndManOpTxPowerLevel

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-1.113 Request Manual


Operation Status on Far
End Tx Power

Rx Gain
SN Function Description
MP
If
F-1.30 Request Manual
N This management function allows the managing system to
Operation Status on Rx
request the status (active/not active) of a manual management
of the gain level.
Gain
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioRxGainTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioManOpRxGain
F-1.31 Initiate/Terminate N This management function allows the managing system to
ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

94/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function Configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Manual Operation on Rx
Gain

F-1.32 Request Manual


Operation Rx Gain Level

F-1.33 Condition Manual


Operation Rx Gain Level

F-1.34 Request Rx Gain


Range

F-1.35 Request Manual


Operation Rx Diversity
Gain Level

F-1.36 Condition Manual


Operation Rx Diversity
Gain Level

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

initiate /terminate a manual management of the gain level.


Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioRxGainTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on radioManOpRxGain
This management function allows the managing system to
request the gain level used when a manual management of
the gain level is active.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioRxGainTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on: radioManOpRxGainLevel
This management function allows the managing system to
condition the gain level used when a manual management of
the gain level is active.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioRxGainTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on: radioManOpRxGainLevel
This management function allows the managing system to
request the allowed range (minimum and maximum values) of
the gain level.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioRxGainTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
radioMinRxGain
radioMaxRxGain
This management function allows the managing system to
request the gain level related to the diversity receiver and used
when a manual management of the gain level is active.
This function is applicable only in case of Space Diversity
configuration.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioRxGainTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioManOpRxDivGainLevel
This management function allows the managing system to
condition the gain level related to the diversity receiver and
used when a manual management of the gain level is active.
This function is applicable only in case of Space Diversity
configuration.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioRxGainTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on radioManOpRxDivGainLevel
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

95/202

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

96/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function
Analogue SN Function Description
Measurements
MP
If
F-1.40 Request Radio
Y This management function allows a managing system to
request the number of the radio channel associated to a
Channel Number
analog measure.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-SDH-MIB:
opticsIMRadioAnalogueMeasuresTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on analogueMeasuresRadioChannelNumber
F-1.41 Request Local
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Analogue Measurements
request the measurements of the local transmitted and
received power levels.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioAnalogueMeasuresTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
analogueMeasuresLocalTxPower
analogueMeasuresLocalRxMainPower
F-1.42 Request Remote
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Analogue Measurements
request the measurements of the remote transmitted and
received power levels.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioAnalogueMeasuresTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
analogueMeasuresRemoteTxPower
analogueMeasuresRemoteRxMainPower
F-1.43 Request Local
N This management function allows the managing system to
Diversity Analogue
request the measures of the local received power levels
Measurement
related to the diversity receiver.
This function is applicable only in case of Space Diversity
configuration.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioAnalogueMeasuresTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on analogueMeasuresLocalRxDivPower
F-1.44 Request Remote
N This management function allows the managing system to
Diversity Analogue
request the measures of the remote received power levels
Measurement
related to the diversity receiver.
This function is applicable only in case of Space Diversity
configuration.
Scope

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Analogue Measurements

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioAnalogueMeasuresTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on analogueMeasuresRemoteRxDivPower
Radio Protection Switching
Function Configuration
F-1.50 Request RPS
Protection Group
Configuration

F-1.51 Request RPS


Automatic Restoration
Criteria

F-1.52 Condition RPS


Automatic Restoration
Criteria

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-1.53 Request RPS


Privileged Channel

F-1.54 Condition RPS


Privileged Channel

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
MP
If
Y This management function allows a managing system to
request the type of protection (1+1 or 1:N) and if the hitless
capability is present or not.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupType
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupHitless
Y This management function allows a managing system to
request the current automatic restoration criteria: restoration
allowed (revertive mode) or inhibited (non-revertive mode).
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupRevertive
Y This management function allows managing system to control
the automatic restoration criteria from the spare channel to
the main one when the failure clears.
This function is applicable only in case of 1+1 protection
group type.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupRevertive
N This management function allows a managing system to
request the privileged channel. This function is applicable only
in case of 1:N protection group type.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET
on
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupPrivilegedChannel
N This management function allows a managing system to set
up the privileged channel. This function is applicable only in
case of 1:N protection group type.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

97/202

F-1.56 Condition RPS


Extra Traffic

F-1.57 Request RPS


Protection Unit Type

F-1.58 Request RPS


Protection Unit Priority

F-1.59 Condition RPS


Protection Unit Priority

F- 1.145 Request EW
alarm Rx Power Level

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

98/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-1.55 Request RPS Extra


Traffic

opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupPrivilegedChannel
This management function allows a managing system to
request the extra traffic status (enabled or disabled). This
function is applicable only in case of 1:N protection group
type.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupExtraTraffic
This management function allows a managing system to
enable/disable the extra traffic. This function is applicable
only in case of 1:N protection group type.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupExtraTraffic
This management function allows a managing system to
request the type of a protection unit: main (protected) or spare
(protecting).
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitType
This management function allows a managing system to
request the priority of a protection unit. It is applicable only in
case of 1:N protection group type.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitPriority
This management function allows a managing system to
condition the priority of the protection unit. It is applicable
only in case of 1:N protection group type.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitPriority
This management function allows a managing system to
request the absolute Received Power Level used to raise an
EW alarm.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F- 1.146 Condition EW
alarm Rx Power Level

F- 1.147 Request EW
alarm Rx Power Level
Range

F- 1.150 Request RPS


Switch on EW alarm
Status

F- 1.151 Condition RPS


Switch on EW alarm

F- 1.152 Request RPS


Switch on lowBER alarm
Status

F- 1.153 Condition RPS


Switch on lowBER alarm

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

opticsIMRxPowerLevelThresholdMngt
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMRxPowerLevelThr scalar object.
This management function allows a managing system to
condition the absolute Received Power Level used to raise an
EW alarm.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRxPowerLevelThresholdMngt
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRxPowerLevelThr
This management function allows a managing system to
request the minimum and maximum values allowed for
absolute Received Power Level used to raise an EW alarm.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRxPowerLevelThresholdMngt
Service Used
SNMP-GET on following scalar object.

opticsIMRxPowerLevelMinThr

opticsIMRxPowerLevelMaxThr
This management function allows a managing system to
request if RPS switch occurs when EW alarm raised for Rx
Power Level or BER threshold crossing, for both. If RPS switch
doesnt occur when EW alarm raised, the disabled value is
returned.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMRadioSwitchEWEnabled scalar object.
This management function allows a managing system to
condition if RPS has to occur when EW alarm raised for Rx
Power Level or BER threshold crossing (enabledBEROnly or
enabledRxPowerOnly value), for both (enabledBoth value)
or if RPS Switch has not to occur for EW alarm (disabled
value).
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioSwitchEWEnabled
This management function allows a managing system to
request if RPS switch occurs when lowBER alarm raised. If RPS
switch doesnt occur when lowBER alarm raised, the disabled
value is returned.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMRadioSwitchLowBEREnabled scalar
object.
This management function allows a managing system to
condition if RPS switch has to occur when lowBER alarm raised
or not.
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

99/202

Operator SN
MP
If
F-1.60 Allow/Inhibit
N
Switch of a RPS Working
Channel

F-1.61 Allow/Inhibit
Switch of RPS Protection
Channel

F-1.62 Initiate/Terminate
Manual Switch to RPS
Protection Channel

ED
WTD

01

It.01

Function Description
This management function allows the managing system to
inhibit/allow a working channel (main) to be switched to a
protection channel (spare). If the main channel was already
switched when the Inhibit Switch is requested, it is forced back
to the working position.
This function involves the lockout syntax to inhibit the switch,
the noRequest syntax to remove the lockout and allow the
switch, both addressed to a main protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitTable (on main protection
unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
(lockout/noRequest)
This management function allows the managing system to
inhibit/allow a protection channel (spare) to provide
protection in the protection scheme. If the protection channel
was already providing protection for a working one when the
Inhibit Switch is requested, then a forced switch is performed
back to the working position.
This function involves the lockout syntax to inhibit the switch,
the noRequest syntax to remove the lockout and allow any
switch, both addressed to the spare protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitTable (on spare protection
unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
(lockout/noRequest)
This management function allows the managing system to
initiate/terminate a manual switch from a working channel
(main) to the protection one (spare). This command will fail if
another working channel has already been switched to the
protection channel (only in case of 1:N) or if the protection
channel is locked or has an automatic switch request (SF,
HBER, LBER, EW) active present.
This function involves the manualSwitch syntax to initiate the
switch, the noRequest syntax to terminate the manual switch,
both addressed to a main protection unit.
Scope

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

100/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function
Commands

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioSwitchLowBEREnabled

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitTable (on main protection
unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
(manualSwitch/noRequest)
Note F-1.62: LBER is not a RPS switch criteria.
F-1.63 Initiate/Terminate P This management function allows the managing system to
Manual Switch to a RPS
initiate/terminate a manual switch from a protection channel
(spare) to a working one (main). This management function is
Working Channel
applicable only in case of 1+1 not revertive protection type.
This command will fail if the working channel has an
automatic switch request (SF, HBER, LBER, EW) active present.
This function involves the manualSwitch syntax to initiate the
switch, the noRequest syntax to terminate the manual switch,
both addressed to the spare protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitTable (on spare protection
unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
(manualSwitch/noRequest)
Note F-1.63: LBER is not a RPS switch criteria.
F-1.64 Initiate/Terminate Y This management function allows the managing system to
Forced Switch to RPS
initiate/terminate a forced switch from a working channel
(main) to a protection one (spare). If another working channel
Protection Channel
has already been automatically or manually switched to the
protection one when the initiate command is received, it is
switched back to its working channel to allow the other
working channel to be switched to the protection one.
This function will fail if another working channel is already
forced switched to the protection one.
This function involves the forcedSwitch syntax to initiate the
switch, the noRequest syntax to terminate the forced switch,
both addressed to a main protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitTable (on main protection
unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
(forcedSwitch/noRequest)
F-1.65 Initiate/Terminate N This management function allows the managing system to
initiate/terminate a forced switch from a protection channel
Forced Switch to a RPS
(spare) to a working one (main). This management function is
Working Channel
applicable only in case of 1+1 not revertive protection type.
This function involves the forcedSwitch syntax to initiate the
switch, the noRequest syntax to terminate the switch, both
addressed to the spare protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

101/202

Protection SN
MP
If
F-1.66 Request RPS
Y
Protection Scheme
Operational State

F-1.67 Request RPS


Protection Status

F-1.68 Request RPS


Protection Mismatch
Status

Function Rx Static Delay SN


Configuration
MP
If
F-1.69 Invoke Automatic
Y
Rx Static Delay
Procedure

ED
WTD

01

It.01

Function Description
This management function allows the managing system to
request the operational state of a radio protection scheme.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupOperationalState
This management function allows the managing system to
request the current state of a radio protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitSwitchCriteria
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitSwitchStatus
This management function allows the managing system to
request a status will indicate if there is any mismatch between
the local and far-end protection type (1+1/1:N).
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupMismatchStatus
Function Description
This management function allows the managing system to
trigger the start of an automatic static delay alignment
procedure on a protection unit (the aligning syntax must be
used). When the procedure has been completed, the agent
has to change the value back to the notAligning syntax.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioRxStaticDelayTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
opticsIMRadioAutoRxStaticDelayAlignment

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

102/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function
Status

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitTable (on spare protection


unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
(forcedSwitch/noRequest)

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

(aligning)
This management function allows the managing system to
status of the automatic static delay alignment procedure on a
protection unit: aligning.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioRxStaticDelayTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMRadioAutoRxStaticDelayAlignment
F-1.71 Request Delays
N This management function allows the managing system to
Inserted by Automatic Rx
request the number of delays inserted by the automatic Rx
Static Delay Procedure
static delay alignment procedure on the direct and indirect
ways.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioRxStaticDelayTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
opticsIMRadioAutoRxStaticDelayDirectWay
opticsIMRadioAutoRxStaticDelayIndirectWay
F-1.72 Initiate/Terminate Y This management function allows the managing system to
initiate or terminate a manual management of the Rx static
Manual Management of
Rx Static Delay
delay.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioRxStaticDelayTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioManRxStaticDelay
F-1.73 Request Delays
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Inserted by a Manual
request the number of delays inserted by a manual
Management of Rx Static
management of the Rx static delay on the direct and indirect
ways.
Delay
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioRxStaticDelayTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
opticsIMRadioManRxStaticDelayDirectWay
opticsIMRadioManRxStaticDelayIndirectWay
F-1.74 Condition Delays
Y This management function allows the managing system to
in Manual Management
condition the number of delays inserted by a manual
of Rx Static Delay
management of the Rx static delay on the direct and indirect
ways.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioRxStaticDelayTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on:
opticsIMRadioManRxStaticDelayDirectWay
opticsIMRadioManRxStaticDelayIndirectWay
Note F-1.74: the opticsIMRadioManRxStaticDelayDirectWay and
opticsIMRadioManRxStaticDelayIndirectWay values must be included in the range 0..31
ED
01
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL
It.01
F-1.70 Request
Automatic Rx Static Delay
Procedure Status

NTIAL
WTD

3DB161760000DSZZA

103/202

HSB Transmission Protection Switching


Function Configuration
F-1.80 Request TPS
Automatic Restoration
Criteria

F-1.81 Condition TPS


Automatic Restoration
Criteria

F-1.82 Request TPS


Protection Unit Type

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function Rx Static Delay SN Function Description


Notification
MP
If
F-1.75 Report Alignment
Y This management function allows a managed system to report
Alarm
a loss of alignment alarm. It is addressed to the involved
radio channel (identified by a radio protection unit).
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMRadioRxStaticDelayTable
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP:
opticsIMAlarmLossOfAlignmentRaise
opticsIMAlarmLossOfAlignmentClear

SN Function Description
MP
If
Y This management function allows a managing system to
request the current automatic restoration criteria: restoration
allowed (revertive mode) or inhibited (non-revertive mode).
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMTxProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMTxProtectionGroupRevertive
Y This management function allows managing system to control
the automatic restoration criteria from the spare transmission
channel to the main one when the failure clears.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMTxProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMTxProtectionGroupRevertive
Y This management function allows a managing system to
request the type of a protection unit: main (protected) or spare
(protecting).
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMTxProtectionUnitType

Operator SN Function Description


MP
If
F-1.83 Allow/Inhibit
Y This management function allows the managing system to

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

104/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function
Commands

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Switch of TPS Protection


Channel

F-1.84 Initiate/Terminate
Manual Switch to TPS
Protection Channel

F-1.85 Initiate/Terminate
Manual Switch to TPS
Working Channel

F-1.86 Initiate/Terminate
Forced Switch to TPS
Protection Channel

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

inhibit/allow a protection channel (spare) to provide


protection in the protection scheme. If the protection channel
was already providing protection for the working one when
the Inhibit Switch is requested, then a forced switch is
performed back to the working position.
This function involves the lockout syntax to inhibit the switch,
the noRequest syntax to remove the lockout and allow any
switch, both addressed to the spare protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitTable (on spare protection
unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
(lockout/noRequest)
This management function allows the managing system to
initiate/terminate a manual switch from a working channel
(main) to the protection one (spare). This command will fail if
the protection channel is locked or has an automatic switch
request active present.
This function involves the manualSwitch syntax to initiate the
switch, the noRequest syntax to terminate the manual switch,
both addressed to a main protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitTable (on main protection
unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
(manualSwitch/noRequest)
This management function allows the managing system to
initiate/terminate a manual switch from a protection channel
to a working one. This management function is applicable
only in case of 1+1 not revertive protection type. This
command will fail if the working channel has an automatic
switch request active present.
This function involves the manualSwitch syntax to initiate the
switch, the noRequest syntax to terminate the manual switch,
both addressed to the spare protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitTable (on spare protection
unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
(manualSwitch/noRequest)
This management function allows the managing system to
initiate/terminate a forced switch from a working channel to a
protection one. If another working channel has already been
automatically or manually switched to the protection one
when the initiate command is received, it is switched back to
its working channel to allow the other working channel to be
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

105/202

Function
Status

Protection SN
MP
If
F-1.88 Request TPS
Y
Protection Scheme
Operational State

F-1.89 Request TPS


Protection Status

F-1.90 Report TPS

ED
WTD

01

It.01

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function Description
This management function allows the managing system to
request the operational state of a HSB TPS protection scheme.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMTxProtectionGroupTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMTxProtectionGroupOperationalState
This management function allows the managing system to
request the current state of a TPS protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitSwitchCriteria
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitSwitchStatus
This management function allows the managed system to

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

106/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-1.87 Initiate/Terminate
Forced Switch to TPS
Working Channel

switched to the protection one.


According to the NE type, this function will fail if protection
channel has a failure condition.
This function involves the forcedSwitch syntax to initiate the
switch, the noRequest syntax to terminate the forced switch,
both addressed to a main protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitTable (on main protection
unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
(forcedSwitch/noRequest)
This management function allows the managing system to
initiate/terminate a forced switch from a protection channel to
a working one. This management function is applicable only
in case of 1+1 not revertive protection type.
This function involves the forcedSwitch syntax to initiate the
switch, the noRequest syntax to terminate the switch, both
addressed to the spare protection unit.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitTable (on spare protection
unit)
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
(forcedSwitch/noRequest)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Protection Switch Event

Common Loss Alarm


Function Configuration
F-1.100 Request CLA
Activity

F-1.101 Condition CLA


Activity

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

report any protection switch event to the managing system,


such as:
protection switching (forced, manual or automatic switch)
protection release (release of forced, manual or automatic
switch)
lockout, release lockout.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB:
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitTable
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP (opticsIMProtectionSwitchReporting) on:
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitSwitchCriteria
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitSwitchStatus

SN Function Description
MP
If
N This management function allows the managing system
request the status of the CLA procedure activity: enabled
disabled.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMRadioCLAEnabled
N This management function allows the managing system
condition the status of the CLA procedure activity: enabled
disabled.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioCLAEnabled

to
or

to
or

Function
Operator SN Function Description
Commands and Status
MP
If
F-1.103 Invoke CLA Reset N This management function allows the managing system to
reset a CLA active. The resetting syntax must be used. When
the reset has been completed, the agent has to change the
value back to the notResetting syntax.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioCLAReset (resetting)
F-1.105 Request CLA
N This management function allows the managing system to
request the status of the CLA procedure: active or not active.
Procedure Status
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB
Service Used
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

107/202

F-1.104 Report CLA


Alarm

SN Function Description
MP
If
N This management function allows a managed system to report
a CLA alarm. It is addressed to an equipment object
supporting the radio transmit function.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-SWTC-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP:
opticsIMAlarmCLARaise
opticsIMAlarmCLAClear

Tx Mute
Function
Operator SN Function Description
Commands and Status
MP
If
F-1.120 Request Local
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Transmitter Mute Status
request the status of the local radio transmitter in terms of
mute function:
no squelch active
squelch active, required by the managing systems
squelch active, required automatically by the agent
squelch active for both the previous reasons
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxMuteTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the columnar objects:
opticsIMRadioManLocalTxMute
opticsIMRadioAutoLocalTxMute
F-1.121 Condition Local
Y This management function allows a managing system to mute
Transmitter Mute Status
a local radio transmitter.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxMuteTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioManLocalTxMute
F-1.122 Request Remote
P This management function allows a managing system to
Transmitter Mute Status
request the status of the remote radio transmitter in terms of
mute function:
no squelch active
squelch active, required by the managing systems
squelch active, required automatically by the agent
squelch active for both the previous reasons

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

108/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function Notifications

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

SNMP-GET on opticsIMRadioCLAStatus

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxMuteTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the columnar objects:
opticsIMRadioManRemoteTxMute
opticsIMRadioAutoRemoteTxMute
Note F-1.122: Only a manual Tx mute can be monitored.
F-1.123 Condition
Y This management function allows a managing system to mute
Remote Transmitter Mute
a local radio transmitter.
Status
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioTxMuteTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMRadioManRemoteTxMute
WST&Radio Service Channels Protections Switching
Function
F-1.xxx All the functions

SN Function Description
MP
If
N

Shifter Definition Functions


Function

F- 1.140 Request Allowed


Shifter

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F- 1.141 Condition Shifter


Definition

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

S Function Description
N
M
PI
f
Y This management function allows a managing system to
request the allowed shifter values and related central
frequency for each radio channel. These informations are
identified by a shifter identifier. The informations available
are:

lists of shifter values and associated central frequency


Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMAllowedShifterTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the columnar objects:

allowedShifterValue

allowedShifterCentralFrequency
Y This management function allows a managing system to
configure the shifter value and consequently the central
frequency for a radio channel.
The shifter value and central frequency are defined setting the
shifter identifier (radioShifterId) associated to the shifter value
and central frequency required (radioShifterValue and
radioShifterCentralFrequency) As a side effect of this
operation the agent must be set the radioShifterValue and
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

109/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

related radioShifterCentralFrequency objects with the values


associated to this identifier. The identifier provided must be
included in the list of the shifter identifiers allowed for that
radio channel (allowedShifterId object).
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioShifterTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on radioShifterId
Note F- 1.141: this management function is allowed only to managers declared as localct in
the related MgrPollingManagerType object of the polling table.
F- 1.142 Request Shifter
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Value and Central
request the shifter value and related central frequency defined
Frequency
for a radio channel. This information is provided by means of
shifter identifier, shifter value and central frequency
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-COMMON-MIB:
opticsIMRadioShifterTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the columnar objects:
radioShifterId
radioShifterValue
radioShifterCentralFrequency
Analogue Points
Function
F-1. xxx All the functions

SN Function Description
MP
If
N

Radio SPI Common Functions


Function
F-2.xx All the functions

SN Function Description
MP
If
N

Radio SPI Urban Haul Functions


Function
F-2.xx All the functions

SN Function Description
MP
If
N

Function

ED
WTD

SN Function Description
MP

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

110/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Radio SPI Long Haul Functions

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

If
F-2.xx All the functions
N
Radio Frame Complementary Overhead Functions
Function
F-2.xx All the functions

SN Function Description
MP
If
N

Radio SDH NE Functions


Function Synchronization SN Function Description
MP
If
F-2.xx All the functions
N
Radio PDH Functions

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function Configuration

SN Function Description
MP
If
F-3.1 Request Radio
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Channel Number
request the number of the radio channel associated to the
radioPDHTTP.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioPDHTTPBidRadioChannelNumber
F-3.2 Request
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Modulation Type
request the modulation type (4 or 16 QAM) supported by a
radioPDHTTP.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioPDHTTPBidModulation
F-3.3 Condition
P This management function allows a managing system to
Modulation Type
condition the modulation type (4 or 16 QAM). According to
the equipment configuration, a change of the modulation of
one radio channel can imply an implicit automatic change
also of the modulation of all the other radio channels. This
behaviour will be defined in the product external
specifications.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on radioPDHTTPBidModulation
Note F-3.3: this management function is not allowed when the ODU 4QAM is provisioned.
F- 3.4 Request Equalizer N This management function allows a managing system to
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

111/202

F-3.6 Request ASAP


Pointer

F-3.7 Condition ASAP


Pointer

Function TP Status
F-3.8 Request TP
Operational State

F-3.9 Request ODU


Service Kit Status

ED
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
MP
If
Y This management function allows the managing system to
request the operational state of a radioPDHTTP.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioPDHTTPBidOperationalState
N This management function allows the managing system to
request if the ODU Service Kit is connected to the transceiver.
When this situation is detected an Abnormal Condition
indication is generated.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioPDHTTPBidOduServiceKit

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

112/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F- 3.5 Condition
Equalizer Status

request the status of equalizer (inhibited or activated)


associated to radioPDHTTP.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioPDHTTPBidEqualizerStatus
This management function allows a managing system to
inhibit or activate the equalizer associated to radioPDHTTP.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on radioPDHTTPBidEqualizerStatus
This management function allows a managing system to
request the ASAP Pointer associated to a radioPDHTTP.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on radioPDHTTPBidAsapIndex
This management function allows a managing system to
configure the ASAP Pointer associated to a radioPDHTTP.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on radioPDHTTPBidAsapIndex

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Status

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function Notifications

SN Function Description
MP
If
F-3.10 Report Radio PDH Y This management function allows a managed system to report
Alarms
transmission alarm related to a radioPDHTTP.
Scope
OPTICSIM-RADIO-TRS-PDH-MIB:
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP:
opticsIMAlarmRxLOSRaise
opticsIMAlarmRxLOSClear
opticsIMAlarmRxDivFailRaise
opticsIMAlarmRxDivFailClear
opticsIMAlarmRxFailRaise
opticsIMAlarmRxFailClear
opticsIMAlarmDemLOSRaise
opticsIMAlarmDemLOSClear
opticsIMAlarmDemFailRaise
opticsIMAlarmDemFailClear
opticsIMAlarmModLOSRaise
opticsIMAlarmModLOSClear
opticsIMAlarmModFailRaise
opticsIMAlarmModFailClear
opticsIMAlarmTxLOSRaise
opticsIMAlarmTxLOSClear
opticsIMAlarmTxFailRaise
opticsIMAlarmTxFailClear
opticsIMAlarmAtpcLoopProblemRaise
opticsIMAlarmAtpcLoopProblemClear
opticsIMAlarmIncompatibleFrequencyRaise
opticsIMAlarmIncompatibleFrequencyClear
opticsIMAlarmIncompatiblePTXRaise
opticsIMAlarmIncompatiblePTXClear
opticsIMAlarmVcoExternalLOSRaise
opticsIMAlarmVcoExternalLOSClear
opticsIMAlarmHighBERRaise
opticsIMAlarmHighBERClear
opticsIMAlarmLowBERRaise
opticsIMAlarmLowBERClear
opticsIMAlarmEarlyWarningRaise
opticsIMAlarmEarlyWarningClear
opticsIMAlarmPathDistortionRaise
opticsIMAlarmPathDistortionClear
opticsIMAlarmRadioDADERaise
opticsIMAlarmRadioDADEClear
opticsIMAlarmRingBrokeRaise
opticsIMAlarmRingBrokeClear

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

113/202

The SNMP tables (with the columnar objects) and the scalar objects supported by this release are
provided in the following table.
For each table the indexes values of all the supported entries are provided too.
The general naming rules for the Radio objects are defined in [17].
Table Entry
Configuration

Description

Indexes
Value

opticsIMRadioTrsCommonMib
opticsIMRadioFrequencyTable
radioTxFrequency
radioRxFrequency
radioMinTxFrequency
radioMaxTxFrequency
radioMinRxFrequency
opticsIMRadioShifterTable
radioShifterId
radioShifterValue
radioShifterCentralFrequency
opticsIMAllowedShifterTable
allowedShifterValue
allowedShifterCentralFrequency

All the 1+0


All the 1+1

Radio port Ch#1 20101


Radio port Ch#1 20101
Radio port Ch#0 20100

All the 1+0

Radio port Ch#1 20101

All the 1+1

Radio port Ch#1 20101


Radio port Ch#0 20100

All the 1+0

Radio port Ch#1 xx01


(xx=01..50
max)
Radio port Ch#1 xx01
(xx=01..50
max)
Radio port Ch#0 xx00
(xx=01..50
max)
Radio port Ch#1 20101
Radio port Ch#1 20101
Radio port Ch#0 20100

All the 1+1

opticsIMRadioTxPowerTable
radioAtpcEnabled
radioMinAtpcTxPower
radioMaxAtpcTxPower
radioAtpcLowPowerThr
radioAtpcLowPowerMinThr
radioAtpcLowPowerMaxThr
radioTxNominalPower
radioCurrentTxPower
radioMinTxPower
radioMaxTxPower
radioMinAllowedAtpcTxPower
radioMaxAllowedAtpcTxPower
opticsIMRadioAnalogueMeasuresTable
analogueMeasuresRadioChannelNumber

ED
WTD

01

It.01

All the 1+0


All the 1+1

All the 1+0


All the 1+1

Radio port Ch#1 20101


Radio port Ch#1 20101

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

114/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

7.3 Supported Objects and Naming Rules

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)
analogueMeasuresLocalTxPower
analogueMeasuresLocalRxMainPower
analogueMeasuresRemoteTxPower
analogueMeasuresRemoteRxMainPower
opticsIMRadioTxMuteTable
opticsIMRadioManLocalTxMute
opticsIMRadioAutoLocalTxMute
opticsIMRadioManRemoteTxMute
opticsIMAlarmAtpcLoopProblemRaise
opticsIMAlarmAtpcLoopProblemClear
opticsIMAlarmHighBERRaise
(note 1)
opticsIMAlarmHighBERClear
(note 1)
opticsIMAlarmEarlyWarningRaise
opticsIMAlarmEarlyWarningClear
opticsIMAlarmRxDivFailRaise
(note 2)
opticsIMAlarmRxDivFailClear
(note 2)
opticsIMAlarmDemDivLOSRaise
(note 3)
opticsIMAlarmDemDivLOSClear
(note 3)
opticsIMAlarmVcoExternalLOSRaise (note 4)
opticsIMAlarmVcoExternalLOSClear (note 4)
opticsIMAlarmIncompatibleFrequencyRaise
opticsIMAlarmIncompatibleFrequencyClear
opticsIMAlarmIncompatiblePTXRaise
opticsIMAlarmIncompatiblePTXClear
opticsIMRadioTrsPdhMib
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable
radioPDHTTPBidRadioChannelNumber
radioPDHTTPBidModulation
radioPDHTTPBidOperationalState
radioPDHTTPBidAsapIndex
opticsIMRadioSwtcMib
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupTable
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupType
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupHitless
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupRevertive
opticsIMRadioProtectionGroupOperationalState
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitTable
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitType
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitSwitchCriteria
opticsIMRadioProtectionUnitSwitchStatus
opticsIMTxProtectionGroupTable
opticsIMTxProtectionGroupRevertive
opticsIMTxProtectionGroupOperationalState
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitTable

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

Table Entry
Configuration

Indexes
Value
Radio port Ch#0 20100
Description

All the 1+0


All the 1+1

Radio port Ch#1 20101


Radio port Ch#1 20101
Radio port Ch#0 20100

All the 1+0


All the 1+1

Radio port Ch#1 20101


Radio port Ch#1 20101
Radio port Ch#0 20100

All the 1+1

All the 1+1

Ch#1

1; 1

Ch#0

1; 0

All the 1+1 HSB

All the 1+1 HSB Ch#1

1; 1

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

115/202

opticsIMTxProtectionUnitSwitchCommand
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitSwitchCriteria
opticsIMTxProtectionUnitSwitchStatus
opticsIMRadioRxStaticDelayTable
opticsIMRadioAutoRxStaticDelayAlignment
opticsIMRadioManRxStaticDelay
opticsIMRadioManRxStaticDelayDirectWay
opticsIMRadioManRxStaticDelayIndirectWay

Table Entry
Configuration

All the 1+1

Ch#0

Indexes
Value
1; 0

Ch#Common

1; 99

Description

(note 1)
These alarm notifications are defined in the Radio domain, but the related defects are
detected by the Main and Extension units (IDU).
(note 2)
The OIDs of these objects (1.3.6.1.4.1.637.54.1.10.1.1.5.17/18) are used for
incompatibleShifter alarm notifications.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)

(note 3)
The OIDs of these objects (1.3.6.1.4.1.637.54.1.10.1.1.5.19/20) are used for
incompatibleModulation alarm notifications.

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

116/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

(note 4)
The OIDs of these objects (1.3.6.1.4.1.637.54.1.10.1.1.5.31/32) are used for
incompatibleCapacity alarm notifications.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

SUPPORT DOMAIN

The support domain includes the management of: agent, event reporting, event logging, alarms,
alarms summary, backup and restore, software download, software package and NE time.

8.1 Functional Description


Agent Management
The identification of the NE is provided in the tsdimNeInstallationType scalar object. The value of this
object is: ULS.
The identification of the software version of the NE is provided in the sysDescr object. It is a 9 bytes
string, defined in the following way:
sysDescr [1] is a V (upper case)
sysDescr [2,3] represents the major version
sysDescr [4,5] represents the minor version
sysDescr [6,7] represents the maintenance version
Then, for the current version (2.1) the value of sysDescr is the following: V0201xx (xx is the value of
the maintenance version).
During the commissioning phase, the operator must configure the opticsIMNeConfigurationTypeId
scalar objects in order to define the NE configuration. Only ETSI market is supported.
The following table provides the list of NE configurations supported in this release with the values of
the opticsIMAllowedNeConfigurationType and opticsIMAllowedNeConfigurationId objects.
OpticsIMAllowedNe
ConfigurationType
value

Main Allowed
Configuration Types
Undefined
UNDEFINED
Without P-AC- SC plug-in
With PSU4860 power supply
1+0

1+0 16E1/DS1
1+0 32E1/DS1
Without P-AC- SC plug-in
With PSU4860 power supply
1+1 HSB

1+1
1+1
1+1
1+1

1+1 FD

HSB 16E1/DS1
HSB 32E1/DS1
FD 16E1/DS1
FD 32E1/DS1

OpticsIMAllowed
Ne
ConfigurationId
value
255

1
2

With EPS MUX protection


4
5
7
8

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

With P-AC- SC plug-in


With PSU4860 power supply
1+0

ED

NTIAL
WTD

1+0 16E1/DS1
1+0 32E1/DS1
01

It.01

10
11
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

117/202

With P-AC- SC plug-in


With PSU4860 power supply
1+1 HSB

1+1
1+1
1+1
1+1

1+1 FD

HSB 16E1/DS1
HSB 32E1/DS1
FD 16E1/DS1
FD 32E1/DS1

OpticsIMAllowed
Ne
ConfigurationId
value
With EPS MUX protection
13
14
16
17

Without P-AC-SC plug-in


With PSU2460 power supply
1+0

1+0 16E1/DS1
1+0 32E1/DS1

49
50

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

OpticsIMAllowedNe
ConfigurationType
value

Main Allowed
Configuration Types

Without P-AC-SC plug-in


With PSU2460 power supply
1+1 HSB

1+1
1+1
1+1
1+1

1+1 FD

HSB 16E1/DS1
HSB 32E1/DS1
FD 16E1/DS1
FD 32E1/DS1

With EPS MUX protection


51
52
53
54

With P-AC-SC plug-in


With PSU2460 power supply
1+0

1+0 16E1/DS1
1+0 32E1/DS1

55
56

With P-AC-SC plug-in


With PSU2460 power supply
1+1
1+1
1+1 FD
1+1
1+1
Without P-AC- SC plug-in
With PSU4860 power supply
With P4DATASW plug-in

HSB 16E1/DS1
HSB 32E1/DS1
FD 16E1/DS1
FD 32E1/DS1

1+0
1+0 16E1/DS1-GETH
Without P-AC- SC plug-in
With PSU4860 power supply
With P4DATASW plug-in
1+1 HSB
1+1 FD
ED
WTD

1+1 HSB 16E1/DS1-GETH


1+1 FD 16E1/DS1-GETH
01

It.01

With EPS MUX protection


57
58
59
60

37

With EPS MUX protection


38
39

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

118/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

1+1 HSB

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

OpticsIMAllowedNe
ConfigurationType
value

Main Allowed
Configuration Types
With P-AC- SC plug-in
With PSU4860 power supply
With P4DATASW plug-in

1+0
1+0 16E1/DS1-GETH
With P-AC- SC plug-in
With PSU4860 power supply
With P4DATASW plug-in
1+1 HSB
1+1 HSB 16E1/DS1-GETH
1+1 FD
1+1 FD 16E1/DS1-GETH
Without P-AC- SC plug-in
With PSU2460 power supply
With P4DATASW plug-in
1+0
1+0 16E1/DS1-GETH
Without P-AC- SC plug-in
With PSU2460 power supply
With P4DATASW plug-in
1+1 HSB
1+1 HSB 16E1/DS1-GETH
1+1 FD
1+1 FD 16E1/DS1-GETH
With P-AC- SC plug-in
With PSU2460 power supply
With P4DATASW plug-in
1+0
1+0 16E1/DS1-GETH
With P-AC- SC plug-in
With PSU2460 power supply
With P4DATASW plug-in
1+1 HSB
1+1 HSB 16E1/DS1-GETH
1+1 FD
1+1 FD 16E1/DS1-GETH
Without P-AC- SC plug-in
With PSU4860 power supply
1+1 HSB

40

With EPS MUX protection


41
42

67

With EPS MUX protection


68
69

70

With EPS MUX protection


71
72

HSB 16E1/DS1
HSB 32E1/DS1
FD 16E1/DS1
FD 32E1/DS1

Without EPS MUX protection


73
74
75
76

1+1 HSB 16E1/DS1

Without EPS MUX protection


77

1+1
1+1
1+1
1+1

1+1 FD

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

OpticsIMAllowed
Ne
ConfigurationId
value

With P-AC- SC plug-in


With PSU4860 power supply
1+1 HSB
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

119/202

1+1 FD

Without P-AC-SC plug-in


With PSU2460 power supply
1+1 HSB

1+1
1+1
1+1
1+1

1+1 FD

HSB 16E1/DS1
HSB 32E1/DS1
FD 16E1/DS1
FD 32E1/DS1

Without EPS MUX protection


81
82
83
84

HSB 16E1/DS1
HSB 32E1/DS1
FD 16E1/DS1
FD 32E1/DS1

Without EPS MUX protection


85
86
87
88

With P-AC-SC plug-in


With PSU2460 power supply
1+1 HSB

1+1
1+1
1+1 FD
1+1
1+1
Without P-AC- SC plug-in
With PSU4860 power supply
With P4DATASW plug-in

1+1 HSB
1+1 HSB 16E1/DS1-GETH
1+1 FD
1+1 FD 16E1/DS1-GETH
With P-AC- SC plug-in
With PSU4860 power supply
With P4DATASW plug-in
1+1 HSB
1+1 HSB 16E1/DS1-GETH
1+1 FD
1+1 FD 16E1/DS1-GETH
Without P-AC- SC plug-in
With PSU2460 power supply
With P4DATASW plug-in
1+1 HSB
1+1 HSB 16E1/DS1-GETH
1+1 FD
1+1 FD 16E1/DS1-GETH
With P-AC- SC plug-in
With PSU2460 power supply
With P4DATASW plug-in
1+1 HSB
1+1 FD

ED
WTD

1+1 HSB 16E1/DS1-GETH


1+1 FD 16E1/DS1-GETH

01

It.01

Without EPS MUX protection


89
90

Without EPS MUX protection


91
92

Without EPS MUX protection


93
94

Without EPS MUX protection


95
96

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

120/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

1+1 HSB 32E1/DS1


1+1 FD 16E1/DS1
1+1 FD 32E1/DS1

OpticsIMAllowed
Ne
ConfigurationId
value
78
79
80

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

OpticsIMAllowedNe
ConfigurationType
value

Main Allowed
Configuration Types

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Table: Supported NE configurations and labels


N.B. When the data plug-in is present (P4DATASW), the foreseen maximum configuration is 16 E1
tributaries (the slot for the P16E1DS1 plug-in is occupied by the data plug-in).
N.B. The following OpticsIMAllowedNEConfigurationId values have been deleted because they were
referred to the PSUVAC power supply, which is not more supported:
from 19 to 36;
from 43 to 48;
and the following ones have been deleted because they were referred to the P2DATAS plug-in, which
is not supported:
3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18;
from 61 to 66;
the deleted positions (36) have been left free to compliant the software requests;
but, the without EPS MUX protection configurations have been added, then the 1+1 configurations
are doubled and so the total configurations are 60 (even if the last configuration is numbered as 96).
The UNDEFINED configuration is the default one.
Software Management
The ULS control system is based on two control elements types:
Equipment Controller (EC)
It has in charge the control and the management of the virtual machine as a whole and also of
the IDU physical resources.
Radio ODU Controller (OC-R)
It has in charge the control and the management of the Radio ODU physical resources.
The ULS can hold two software packages (software versions). Each of them is composed by nine
software units (one for each control element type and one for each FPGA).
The association between software unit index and related label is indicated in the following table.

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

opticsIMSwUnitIndex
value
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

opticsIMSwUnitLabel
string
EC
OC-R
FPGA-JGIDU (R2.0)
FPGA-JGIDU (R2.1)
FPGA-JGRPS
FPGA-GAIA
FPGA-GAIA-EXT
FPGA-MEDUSA
FPGA-DEDALO

The commitment of the activated version takes place implicitly together with the activation itself, so
that in case of restart events, the version used for rebooting is the active version. Since the stand-by
version is not automatically deleted, the system can be reverted back to the previously active version
via another switch request.
A software version mismatch alarm is detected and reported to the managing systems when the active
EC and OC versions are incompatible. In the same way, a stand-by software version mismatch alarm
is detected and reported when the stand-by EC and OC versions are incompatible.
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

121/202

A firmware download on going alarm is reported to the managing systems on ODU Unit at the
beginning of the download of an OC software unit. At the end of the download the alarm is cleared.
In the same way, a firmware download on going alarm is reported on Main/Extension board at the
beginning of a download on one associated FPGA. The alarm will be cleared at the end of FPGA
download.
The number of software units for each software package involved in a download process from
managing system to EC is fixed, it is not dependent on the configuration.
Obviously the number of software unit used on EC to download each FPGA depends on the
configuration:
Up to 7, in case of 1+0 configurations (EC, OC-R, GAIA, GAIA-EXT, JGIDU (R2.0), JGIDU (R2.1),
and MEDUSA or DEDALO only in case of Ethernet configuration)
Up to 8, in case of 1+1 configurations (EC, OC-R, GAIA, GAIA-EXT, JGIDU (R2.0), JGIDU (R2.1),
JGRPS, and MEDUSA or DEDALO only in case of Ethernet configurations).

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

In both cases the EC downloads the correct OC software version. At the end of the download the
alarms above are cleared.

Software Keys
The limitations introduced by the Software key are coded in the sysName scalar object.
The following table provides the list of sysName values with the Configuration supported for each
value.

4E1 4QAM

4E1 4/16QAM
8E1 4QAM

8E1 4/16QAM

16E1 4QAM

16E1 4/16QAM

ED
WTD

01

It.01

Configuration Supported
Frame structure

Modulation

2E1
4E1
2E1
4E1
2E1
4E1
8E1
2E1
4E1
8E1
2E1
4E1
8E1
16E1
2E1
4E1
8E1
16E1
2E1
4E1
8E1

4QAM
4QAM
4QAM
4QAM or 16QAM
4QAM
4QAM
4QAM
4QAM
4QAM or 16QAM
4QAM or 16QAM
4QAM
4QAM
4QAM
4QAM
4QAM
4QAM or 16QAM
4QAM or 16QAM
4QAM or 16QAM
4QAM
4QAM or 16QAM
4QAM or 16QAM

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

122/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

sysName
value

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

32E1 16QAM

16E1
32E1

4QAM or 16QAM
16QAM

N.B. Only E1 is supported.


The limitations introduced by the Software key are related only to frame structure and modulation
configuration.
There are no limits related to the NE Configuration type. Software key value and NE Configuration
type are independent.
Event Logging
The Log size is 800 records (500 for alarms, 300 for events). A wrapping mechanism is provided.
Abnormal Conditions
The triggering events for abnormal conditions are the following:
opticsIMOffNormalDescript
Event Type
ion
String (max 80 characters)
Forced switch (EPS, RPS, TPS)
Forced switch
Lockout (EPS, RPS, TPS)
Lockout
Loopbacks activation
Active
Local radio Tx mute (manual)
Local manual Tx mute
Local radio Tx mute (automatic)
Local automatic Tx mute
Remote radio Tx mute (manual)
Local manual Tx mute
(note 1)
Remote manual Tx mute
Rx
Static
Delay
manual
Rx Static Delay manual operation
operation
RDI alarm forced by manual RDI alarm forced by manual
operation for E1 framed tributary
operation (line side)
RDI alarm forced by manual RDI alarm forced by manual
operation for E1 framed tributary
operation (radio side)

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

(note 1)
This event triggers an abnormal condition both on the NE where the transmitter is
squelched and on the NE that requires to the remote one to squelch the trasmitter. In the first case the
string used for the opticsIMOffNormalDescription object is Local manual Tx mute, in the second one
Remote manual Tx mute.

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

123/202

Function Event Reporting SN Function Description


Management
MP
If
F-1. Create Event Report Y This function allows a managing system to initiate reporting of
events to the specified address.
Scope
This
function
permits
to
create
an
EventForwardingDiscriminator managed object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following tsdimEFDTable columnar
objects:
tsdimEFDDest (the IP address of the managing system)
tsdimEFDPort (the UDP port of the managing system)
tsdimEFDTrapId
tsdimEFDTrapObject
tsdimEFDLowestForwardedSeverity
tsdimEFDIndeterminate
tsdimEFDManagerIndex
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to
createAndWait value.
F-2. Activate Event
Y This function allows a managing system to initiate reporting of
Report
events to the specified address after a communication lost.
Scope
This
function
permits
to
activate
an
EventForwardingDiscriminator
managed
object.
The
EventForwardingDiscriminator managed object has to be
activate in case it has been put out of service by managed
system because of communication lost.
Service Used
SNMP-SET to active value on the RowStatus
columnar object in tsdimEFDTable managed table.
F-3. Delete Event Report Y This function allows a managing system to terminate reporting
of events to the specified address.
Scope
This
function
permits
to
delete
an
EventForwardingDiscriminator managed object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to destroy
value.
F-4. Allow/Inhibit Event
Y This function allows a managing system to allow and inhibit
the reporting of events to itself. Row status object is the one
Report
involved in this management: its value notInService means
locked, viceversa row status as unlocked means active.
Scope
ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

124/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

The following table lists the Support management functions supported in this release (see [8]).

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

8.2 Management Functions

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-5. Request Event


Report

F-6. Condition Event


Report

F-7. Report Event

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

This function permits to lock or unlock the state of an EFD


object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the tsdimEFDRowStatus columnar object
inside tsdimEFDTable.
This function allows a managing system to retrieve
information about one or more reporting destinations related
to different group of events.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve data related to one or more
EFD objects.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following tsdimEFDTable columnar
objects:
tsdimEFDDest (the IP address of the managing system)
tsdimEFDPort (the UDP port of the managing system)
tsdimEFDTrapId
tsdimEFDTrapObject
tsdimEFDLowestForwardedSeverity
tsdimEFDIndeterminate
tsdimEFDOperStatus
tsdimEFDRowStatus
This function allows a managing system to modify information
about one or more reporting destinations related to different
group of events
Scope
This function permits to modify data related to one or more
EFD objects.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following tsdimEFDTable columnar
objects:
tsdimEFDDest (the IP address of the managing system)
tsdimEFDPort (the UDP port of the managing system)
tsdimEFDTrapId
tsdimEFDTrapObject
tsdimEFDLowestForwardedSeverity
tsdimEFDIndeterminate
This function allows a managed system to report events to the
managing system.
The event reports contain at least the following mandatory
information when applicable to the specific event:
managedObjectClass
managedObjectInstance
notificationIdentifier: it has to be unique at a network
element level.
eventTime with the accuracy of one second. In case of
clear of an alarm, it will be considered as the time at which
the corresponding clearing of the fault cause has been
determined by the defect filtering process.
specificProblems (in case of clear of alarms it has the
same value as the one present in the event sent when the
alarm was raised)
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

125/202

F-8. Report Alert Event

F-9. Request Alert Event


Configuration

F-10. Condition Alert


Event Configuration

ED
WTD

01

It.01

This function applies to all managed objects capable to notify


events.
Scope
This function permits to a managed system to send all the
very urgent events to the managing systems. The very
urgent events are the ones specified in the EFD objects.
Moreover a managing system could retrieve all the events
form LOGs and APT objects.
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP the events are marked as very urgent,
otherwise
SNMP-GET (into LOG and/or APT objects from
managing system)
This function allows a managed system to report alert events
to the managing system.
The alert event reports contain at least the following
mandatory information:
notificationIdentifier: it is the notification identifier of
the last event emitted
eventTime: it is the time of the last event emitted
Scope
This function permits to a managed system to send an alert
notification to the managing systems.
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP the tsdimAlertNotification events
This function allows a managing system to retrieve the
configuration of the alert notification mechanism.
Scope
This function permits to a managing system to retrieve data
related to the time and frequency counters used by managed
system in order to send an alert notification to the managing
systems.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following scalar objects:
tsdimAlertNotifTimeOut
tsdimAlertNotifFreqCount
This function allows a managing system to modify the
configuration of the alert notification mechanism.
Scope
This function permits to a managing system to modify data
related to the time and frequency counters used by managed
system in order to send an alert notification to the managing
systems.
Service Used

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

126/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

N.B. The Event Type or Probable Cause (in case of alarm) is


defined as the SNMP identifier of the notification.

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

perceivedSeverity with the value cleared in case of


clear of alarms

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function Event Logging SN


Management
MP
If
F-11. Request Maximum Y
Notification Identifier
Value

F-12. Request Log Status

F-13. Request Log Size

F-14. Inhibit/Allow
Logging

F-15. Request Log


Records

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

SNMP-SET on the following scalar objects:


tsdimAlertNotifTimeOut
tsdimAlertNotifFreqCount

Function Description
This function allows a managing system to retrieve
information about the notification identifier used as a unique
numbering in the event creations.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the allowable maximum
notification identifier number.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the tsdimMaxNotificationId scalar
object.
This function allows a managing system to retrieve the status
of the logs provided by the managed system.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the administrative and
operational states of the alarm and event logs inside a
managed system.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following columnar objects of the
tsdimLogTable
tsdimLogObjectClassIdentifier (the type of log, alarm
or event logs)
tsdimLogAdminStatus
tsdimLogOperStatus
This function allows a managing system to retrieve the size of
the logs provided by the managed system.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the maximum size of the
alarm and event logs inside a managed system.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following columnar objects of the
tsdimLogTable
tsdimLogMaxSize
This function allows a managing system to allow or inhibit the
logging of the notification raised by managed system, both
alarms and events.
Scope
This function permits to modify the administrative status of the
log objects.
Service Used
SNMP-SET of the tsdimLogAdminStatus columnar
object inside the tsdimLogTable.
This function allows a managing system to request to the
managed system one or a set of log records.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the log records stored inside
the alarm and event logs depending on which logs are
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

127/202

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

128/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function Alarm Severity SN Function Description


Management
MP
If
F-17. Request Default
Y This function allows a managing system to retrieve
ASAP Severity
information about the default severity used.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the default severity used in
case is not defined a specific ASAP object for a certain
probableCause.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the tsdimAlarmSevDefault scalar object
F-18. Condition Default
Y This function allows a managing system to modify information
ASAP Severity
about the used default severity.
Scope
This function permits to modify the default severity used in
case is not defined a specific ASAP object for a certain
probableCause.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the tsdimAlarmSevDefault scalar object
F-19. Request Next
Y This function allows a managing system to retrieve the next
ASAP Index
index value to use in free ASAP creation.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the value of the index to be
used in the creation of the ASAP object.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the tsdimAlarmSevProfileIndexNext
scalar object
F-20. Create Alarm
Y This function allows a managing system to define different
Severity Profile
ASAP objects.
Scope
This function permits to create an ASAP object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following tsdimAlarmSevProfileTable
columnar object:
tsdimAlarmSevProfileIndex

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

supported.
Service Used
SNMP-GET of the entries in the tsdimEventLogTable,
tsdimGenEventLog and tsdimAlarmLogTable managed tables.
Note F-15: tsdimGenEventLog is not supported.
F-16. Report Log State
Y This function allows a managed system to report log state
Change
change events to the managing system.
Scope
This function is used by managed system in order to
communicate to managing system all the logs operational
state changing.
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP tsdimStateChangeNotification on the
tsdimLogTable

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-21. Delete Alarm


Severity Profile

F-22. Create Alarm


Severity

F-23. Delete Alarm


Severity

F-24. Request Alarm


Severity

F-25. Condition ASAP


User Label

F-26. Request ASAP User


Label

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

SNMP-SET
on
tsdimAlarmSevProfileRowStatus
columnar object to createAndGo value.
This function allows a managing system to terminate different
ASAP objects.
Scope
This function permits to delete an ASAP object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to destroy
value.
This function allows a managing system to define different
<alarm severity probableCause> attributes inside an Alarm
Severity Profile object.
Scope
This function permits to create a couple of objects used to
associate a severity to a probableCause. The probableCause
is defined as trap OID.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following tsdimAlarmSevTable
columnar object:
tsdimAlarmSevProfileIndex, this has to be equal to an
index already present in the tsdimAlarmSevProfileTable
tsdimAlarmSevTrapId
tsdimAlarmSevSeverity
tsdimAlarmSevSeverityNotServAff
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to
createAndGo value.
This function allows a managing system to terminate different
alarm severity objects.
Scope
This function permits to delete an alarm severity object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to destroy
value.
This function allows to managing system to retrieve all the
information related to the ASAP objects both the predefined
either the free ones.
Scope
This functions permits to retrieve one or more <severity
probableCause> couples of objects related to one or more
ASAP objects.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on tsdimAlarmSevTable managed table.
This management function permits to configure the User Label
associated to an ASAP entry.
Scope
TSDIM-SUPPORT-MIB: tsdimAlarmSevProfileTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on tsdimAlarmSevProfileUserLabel
This management function permits to request the User Label
associated to an ASAP entry.
Scope
TSDIM-SUPPORT-MIB: tsdimAlarmSevProfileTable
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

129/202

Function
Abnormal SN Function Description
Condition Management - MP
If
F-78. Request Abnormal Y This function allows a managing system to request the status
Condition Status
of the NE in terms of abnormal conditions.
Scope
TSDIM-SUPPORT-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the opticsIMActiveAbnCond scalar object.
F-79. Request Abnormal Y This function allows a managing system to request the list of
Condition Affected
objects that result in an abnormal condition.
Objects
Scope
TSDIM-SUPPORT-MIB:
opticsIMAbnCondAffectedObjectsListTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the opticsIMAbnCondAffectedObjectInstanceId
columnar object.
F-95. Request Abnormal Y This function allows a managing system to request the
Condition Description
description of an abnormal (off normal) condition.
Scope
TSDIM-SUPPORT-MIB:
opticsIMAbnCondAffectedObjectsListTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the opticsIMOffNormalDescription columnar
object.
Function Backup and SN Function Description
Restore Management
MP
If
F-28. Request NE
Y This function allows a managing system to ask to a managed
system its NE software version in order to couple it with the
Software Version
backup file.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the software version managed

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

130/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function Alarm Summary SN Function Description


Management
MP
If
F-27. Request Active
Y This function allows a managing system to ask to a managed
Problems Table
system the list of all active alarms collects by the managed
system.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve all the active alarms stored
inside activeProblemTable managed object.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the tsdimAPTTable managed object

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Service Used
SNMP-GET on tsdimAlarmSevProfileUserLabel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-29. Condition Backup


File Name

F-30. Request Backup


Manager Identifier

F-31. Condition Backup


Manager Identifier

F-32. Condition Restore


Software Version

F-33. Condition Restore


File Name

F-34. Condition Restore


Manager Identifier

F-35. Request Restore


Manager Identifier

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

object.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the sysDescr managed object
This function allows a managing system to define the name of
the backup file.
Scope
This function permits to set the file name object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the opticsIMBackupFilename managed
object
This function allows a managing system to request the
identifier value of the managing system that has activated a
backup operation.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the identifier object.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the opticsIMBackupRequestorAddress
managed object
This function allows a managing system to define its proper
identifier value for backup operation. This will permit to have
only one operation at time.
Scope
This function permits to set the identifier object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the opticsIMBackupRequestorAddress
managed object
This function allows a managing system to set to a managed
system the NE software version associated to the file that will
be restored.
Scope
This function permits to set the restore file software version
managed object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the opticsIMRestoreSWVersion managed
object
This function allows a managing system to define the name of
the restore file.
Scope
This function permits to set the file name object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the opticsIMRestoreFilename managed
object
This function allows a managing system to define its proper
identifier value for restore operation. This will permit to have
only one operation at time.
Scope
This function permits to set the identifier object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the opticsIMRestoreRequestorAddress
managed object
This function allows a managing system to request the
identifier value of the managing system that has activated a
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

131/202

F-37. Condition Restore


State

F-38. Request Backup


State

Function
Management

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

132/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Agent SN Function Description


MP
If
F-40. Request NE
Y This function allows a managing system to ask to a managed
Installation Type
system its installation type (such as 4x4 board characteristic).
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the NE installation type
managed object.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the tsdimNeInstallationType managed
object

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-36. Request Restore


State

restore operation.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the identifier object.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the opticsIMRestoreRequestorAddress
managed object
This function allows a managing system to ask to a managed
system the state of the restore operation.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the state of a restore
operation.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the opticsIMRestoreState managed
object
This function allows a managing system to change the inprogress state of the restore operation. A managing system
has to specify the following states:
- downloading state,
- present state when the file has been successfully
transferred; in case of Sub SNMP NE supporting Restore in
one phase, the NE implicitly set this state to apply,
- apply state to communicate to the Agent that it has to
apply the restore file, applicable only to stand-alone SNMP NE
supporting Restore in two-phases.
The absent value is set by Agent as default value.
Scope
This function permits to modify the state of a restore
operation.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the opticsIMBackupState managed
object
This function allows a manager system to retrieve the state of
the Backup operation.
Scope
This function permits to get the Backup state scalar object.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the opticsIMBackupState managed
object

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-41. Request Board


Position

F-42. Request InfoModel Version

F-44. Request SDH NE


Label

F-45. Condition SDH NE


Label

F-86. Request Manager


List

F-87. Condition
Manager List

F-48. Request Local


Access Control State

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

This function allows a managing system to ask to a managed


system its board position inside the shelf.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the NE board position
managed object.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the tsdimBoardPosition managed object
This function allows a managing system to ask to a managed
system which info-model version it supports.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the NE Info-model version
managed objects.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the tsdimInfoModelVersionMajor,
tsdimInfoModelVersionMinor
and
tsdimInfoModelVersionMaintenance managed objects
This function allows a managing system to ask to a managed
system information about the SDH NE label configuration.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the SDH NE label managed
object.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the tsdimSdhNeLabel managed object
This function allows a managing system to set to a managed
system the SDH NE label object.
Scope
This function permits to set the SDH NE label managed object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the tsdimSdhNeLabel managed object
This function allows a managing system to ask to a managed
system information about the ManagerList, i.e. the list of
manager owner of NE.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the ManagerList managed
object.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the opticsImNEOwnsByMgr managed
object
This function allows a managing system to set to a managed
system the object containing the information about the
ManagerList.
Scope
This function permits to set the ManagerList managed object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the opticsImNEOwnsByMgr managed
object
This function allows a managing system to ask to a managed
system information about the Craft Terminal local access
control state.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the Craft Terminal local
access control state managed object.
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

133/202

F-50. Request Local


Access Control Time Out
Period

F-51. Condition Local


Access Control Time Out
Period

F-58. Request NE
Software Release

F-59. Request NE
Location

F-60. Condition NE
Location

F-61. Request NE
SubRelease

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

134/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-49. Condition Local


Access Control State

Service Used
SNMP-GET on the tsdimLacState managed object
This function allows a managing system to set to a managed
system the object containing the information about the Craft
Terminal local access control state.
Scope
This function permits to set the Craft Terminal local access
control state managed object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the tsdimLacState managed object
This function allows a managing system to ask to a managed
system information about the Craft Terminal local access
control time out period interval.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the Craft Terminal local
access control time out period interval managed object.
Service Used
SNMP-GET
on
the
tsdimLacNoResponseTimeOutPeriod managed object
This function allows a managing system to set to a managed
system the object containing the information about the Craft
Terminal local access control time out period interval.
Scope
This function permits to set the Craft Terminal local access
control time out period interval managed object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the tsdimLacNoResponseTimeOutPeriod
managed object
This function allows a managing system to ask to a managed
system which is its software release.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the NE software release.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the sysDescr managed object
This function allows a managing system to ask to a managed
system which is its location value.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the NE location.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the sysLocation managed object
This function allows a managing system to modify the location
value of a managed system.
Scope
This function permits to modify the NE location.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the sysLocation managed object
This function allows a managing system to ask to a managed
system which is its subrelease value.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the NE subrelease.

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Service Used
SNMP-GET on the sysName managed object
Note F-61: Function used to request license key information.
F-62. Request NE
Y This management function allow the managing system to
Allowed Configurations
request the configurations allowed for the supported NE.
Scope
TSDIM-SNMPNE-MIB:
opticsIMAllowedNeConfigurationTypeTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMAllowedNeConfigurationType
F-63. Request NE
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Configuration
request the NE configuration type. This information is
provided by means of NE configuration type identifier and
associated string.
Scope
TSDIM-SNMPNE-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the scalar objects:

opticsIMNeConfigurationTypeId

opticsIMNeConfigurationType
F-64. Condition NE
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Configuration
define the NE configuration type. It is defined setting the
identifier (NeConfigurationTypeId object) associated to the NE
configuration type string required (NeConfigurationType
object). As a side effect of this operation the agent must set
the NeConfigurationType object with the configuration type
string associated to this identifier.
The identifier provided must be included in the list of the
allowed NE configuration type identifiers.
Scope
TSDIM-SNMPNE-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMNeConfigurationTypeId
F-65. Request Market
Y This management function allows the managing system to
request the market (ETSI or ANSI) in which the NE is used.
Scope
TSDIM-SNMPNE-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMMarket
F-66. Condition Market

F-96. Request
Equipment
Name

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

This management function allows the managing system to


define the market (ETSI or ANSI) in which the NE is used.
Scope
TSDIM-SNMPNE-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMMarket
This management function allows the managing system to
request the NE name (it specifies NE type, configuration,
frequency, modulation).
Scope
TSDIM-SNMPNE-MIB: opticsIMNeConfiguration
Service Used
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

135/202

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

136/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function
Software SN Function Description
Download Management MP
If
F-67. Condition Server
Y This management function allows a managing system to
Information
configure the (e.g. Ftp) Server information. This information is
used by the Client to connect the Server during a Software
Download Operation.
Scope
The managing system configures:
the Server Address;
the Server Port;
the Server UserId;
the Server Password;
the Root Directory where the Software Package to be
downloaded is stored on the Server.
Service Used
SNMP-Set on opticsImSwdlServerAddress,
opticsImSwdlServerPort, opticsImSwdlServerPassword,
opticsImSwdlServerRootDir Scalar Objects.
F-68. Initiate a
Y This management function allows a managing system to
initiate a software downloading operation.
Downloading Operation
Only one downloading operation can be performed at the
same time.
This operation can be performed only if the NE is not
restoring the MIB database that is if the opticsIMRestoreState
has the value absent or present.
Upon activation of rowStatus the opticsIMswdlStatusIndicator
is changed to Downloading.
N.B. It is up to the agent the single Download running
check.
Scope
The managing system configures:
1.
The identifier of the new software release (SW Package
Version, Sw Package Label and Descriptor Name) to be
delivered to the managed system;
2.
an optional flag (ForcedDowndload) which indicates
whether the version indicated by the identifier of the new
software release has to be loaded entirely regardless of the
fact that some software units may already be present in the
NE.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following columnar objects of
opticsIMSwdlInitTable:
opticsImSwdlInitForcedDownload
opticsImSwdlInitSwPkgVersion
opticsImSwdlInitSwPkgLabel
opticsImSwdlInitDescrName
SNMP-SET on opticsImSwdlInitRowStatus columnar object to

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

SNMP-GET on opticsIMNeEquipmentName

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-69. Abort/Destroy a
Downloading Operation

F-70. Request
Downloading
Information

ActivecreateAndGo value.
This management function has the aim to clean up the
Download operation at Agent side.
It could be used both to stop an in progress download and to
destroy the row occupied.
Scope
The managing system configures to Delete the
opticsImSwdlInitRowStatus.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsImSwdlInitRowStatus columnar object to
Destroy value.
This management function allows a managing system to
request downloading information at configurable polling
expiration.
Scope
The managing system can retrieve the Percentage, the Total
Number of Bytes, the Current SW Unit Version and Label of
the in-progress Software Download operation.
When terminated the managing system can retrieve the Result
of previous Software Download operation, during an inprogress Software Download the Result takes the
underDownloading value.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on
opticsIMSwdlPercentage,
opticsIMSwdlTotalBytes,
opticsIMSwdlCurrentSwUnitVersion,
opticsIMSwdlCurrentSwUnitLabel,
opticsImSwdlResult.

Function
Software SN Function Description
Package Management
MP
If
F-71. Activate a StandY This function allows a managing system to activate a stand-by
by Software Version
software version which is already stored on the managed
system. It cannot be performed while the NE is downloading a
database, that is if the opticsIMRestoreState object has the
value downloading.
If a forced activation is required, the stand-by software version
is activated also if it is the same as the active software version.
The function can apply only on a stand-by version. Upon a
successful completion of the function the managed system
updates the state of the addressed software version with the
value activated or committed according to the way of
working of the NE. The software version active is updated by
the managed system with the stand-by value if it was in the
activated status, with the value boot if it was in the
committed one.
Scope
TSDIM-SUPPORT-MIB: opticsIMSwPackageTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMSwPackageCommand columnar
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

137/202

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

138/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel
1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

object (activation or forcedActivation syntax)


Note F-71: The commitment takes place implicitly together with the activation of a software
version.
F-72. Request Software
Y This function allows a managing system to request to the
Version Activation Result
managed system the result of a activation command (forced
or not) on a software version.
The error code managed are listed hereafter:
download in progress if a stand-by version try to be
activated when a download operation is in-progress.
only one memory bank full: if there is only one
software version inside the managed element (i.e. no stand-by
version).
software release corrupted: if the check on software
release to be activated fails.
switch not allowed by the NE state: if the activation of
a new version may leave the managed system in an
inconsistent state (for instance if the data base cannot be
reverted to an old format and no other data are available).
software unit missing: If the managed system is
equipped with one or more boards whose software image is
not available on the NE.
swReleaseCorrupted: if the operationalState of the
stand-by software version is disabled.
Scope
TSDIM-SUPPORT-MIB: opticsIMSwPackageTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMSwPackageActivationResult
columnar object
F-73. Commit an Active
N This function allows a managing system to commit the current
Software Version
active software version on the managed system. It cannot be
performed while the NE is downloading a database, that is if
the opticsIMRestoreState object has the value downloading.
The commit function can apply only on an active version.
When the commitment is performed, the active software
version is used as the boot version for a spontaneous restart in
case of crash or restart. Upon a successful completion of the
function the managed system updates the the state of the
software version with the value committed.
Scope
TSDIM-SUPPORT-MIB: opticsIMSwPackageTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMSwPackageCommand columnar
object (commit syntax)
F-74. Request Software
Y This function allows a managing system to request
Package Information
information about the software package.
Scope
TSDIM-SUPPORT-MIB: opticsIMSwPackageTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following columnar objects:
opticsIMSwPackageCommand

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-75. Request Software


Unit Information

F-76. NE Restart Request

F-94. Request
Equipment Software Unit
Information

opticsIMSwPackageState
opticsIMSwPackageActivationDate
opticsIMSwPackageLabel
opticsIMSwPackageVersion
opticsIMSwPackageOperationalState
This function allows a managing system to request
information about software units included in a software
package.
Scope
TSDIM-SUPPORT-MIB: opticsIMSwUnitTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following columnar objects:
opticsIMSwUnitLabel
opticsIMSwUnitVersion
opticsIMSwUnitSize
This function allows a managing system to request a restart of
the managed system, using the committed software version.
Scope
TSDIM-SUPPORT-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMNERestartRequest scalar object (restart
syntax is used)
This function allows a managing system to request
information about software unit running on a board identified
by its equipment position.
Scope
TSDIM-SUPPORT-MIB: opticsIMEqptSwUnitTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following columnar objects:
opticsIMEqptSwUnitLabel
opticsIMEqptSwUnitVersion

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function
Management

Time SN Function Description


MP
If
F-80. Request NE
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Current Time
request the current time of the NE. If NTP is enabled this
function is not supported.
Scope
TSDIM-SNMPNE-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMExternalTime
F-81. Condition NE Time Y This management function allows the managing system to
condition the time of the NE. The agent makes it
instantaneously its new own time. If NTP is enabled this
function is not supported.
Scope
TSDIM-SNMPNE-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMExternalTime
F-82. Request NTP
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Status
request the current status of the NTP (enabled/disabled).
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

139/202

F-84. Request NTP


Servers Addresses and
Reachability

F-85. Condition NTP


Servers Addresses

Function
Management

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

140/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Filtering SN Function Description


MP
If
F-89. Condition HD
Y This management function permits to condition the HD
Retrieval Time
retrieval Time. The parameters to be configured are:

the OS which has collected the HD

the Begin Time

the End Time

the GranularityPeriod
Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMONPM-MIB:
opticsIMFilterHistoryDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on
opticsIMFilterHDStartByOS
opticsIMFilterHDBeginTimeInterval
opticsIMFilterHDEndTimeInterval
opticsIMFilterHDGranularityPeriod
Note F-89: opticsIMFilterHDStartByOS is not supported
F-90. Create Filter
Y This management function permits to create one Filter History
History Data Entry
Data entry. The management system has to indicate in the

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-83. Condition NTP


Status

Scope
TSDIM-SNMPNE-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMNTPStatus
This management function allows the managing system to
enable/disable the NTP.
Scope
TSDIM-SNMPNE-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMNTPStatus
This management function allows the managing system to
request the addresses of the NTP servers (main and spare)
and the related reachability.
Scope
TSDIM-SNMPNE-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following scalar objects:
opticsIMMainNTPServerAddress
opticsIMSpareNTPServerAddress
opticsIMNTPServersReachabilityStatus
This management function allows the managing system to
condition the addresses of the NTP servers (main and spare).
Scope
TSDIM-SNMPNE-MIB
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following scalar objects:
opticsIMMainNTPServerAddress
opticsIMServerNTPServerAddress

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

creation request:

its own IP Address

its own UDP Port


Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMONPM-MIB:
opticsIMFilterHistoryDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMFilterHDRowStatus columnar object to
createAndGo value
F-91. Delete Filter
Y This management function permits to delete one Filter History
History Data Entry
Data entry.
Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMONPM-MIB:
opticsIMFilterHistoryDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMFilterHDRowStatus columnar object to
destroy value
Note: The History Data filtering functions hereafter described are applicable to all HD objects.
This note is referred to all the filtering management functions (from F-89 to F-91).
Function EPS
Management

add

on SN Function Description
MP
If
F-xx. All the functions
N

8.3 Supported Objects and Naming Rules


The SNMP tables (with the columnar objects) and the scalar objects supported by this release are
provided in the following table.
For each table the indexes values of all the supported entries are provided too.
The general naming rules for the Support domain objects are defined in [17].
Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)

Table Entry
Description

Indexes
Value

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

tsdimSupportMib
tsdimEFDTable
tsdimEFDDest
tsdimEFDTrapId
tsdimEFDTrapObject
tsdimEFDPort
tsdimEFDLowestForwardedSeverity
tsdimEFDIndeterminate
tsdimEFDOperStatus
tsdimEFDRowStatus
tsdimEFDManagerIndex

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

Max 5 entries

1..N

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

141/202

tsdimAlarmSevTable
tsdimAlarmSevSeverity
tsdimAlarmSevRowStatus
tsdimAlarmSevSeverityNotServAff

opticsIMSwdlInitTable
opticsIMSwdlInitForcedDownload
opticsIMSwdlInitSwPkgVersion
opticsIMSwdlInitSwPkgLabel
opticsIMSwdlInitDescrName
opticsIMSwdlInitRowStatus

ED
WTD

01

It.01

Description
Max 500 entries

Max 300 entries

Indexes
Value
<time>;
<notifId>

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

tsdimAlarmLogTable
tsdimAlarmLogProbableCause
tsdimAlarmLogObjectClassIdentifier
tsdimAlarmLogObjectInstanceIdentifier
tsdimAlarmLogSeverity
tsdimAlarmLogSpecificProb
tsdimAlarmLogTime
tsdimEventLogTable
tsdimEventLogEventType
tsdimEventLogObjectClassIdentifier
tsdimEventLogObjectInstanceIdentifier
tsdimEventLogTime
tsdimLogTable
tsdimLogObjectClassIdentifier
tsdimLogAdminStatus
tsdimLogOperStatus
tsdimLogMaxSize
tsdimAPTTable
tsdimAPTAlarmProbableCause
tsdimAPTAlarmObjectClassIdentifier
tsdimAPTAlarmObjectInstanceIdentifier
tsdimAPTAlarmSeverity
tsdimAPTAlarmSpecificProb
tsdimAPTAlarmTime
tsdimAlarmSevProfileTable
tsdimAlarmSevProfileRowStatus
tsdimAlarmSevProfileUserLabel

Table Entry

<time>;
<notifId>

1..2

Max 100 entries

<time>;
<notifId>

ASAP#1 (predefined)
ASAP#2 (predefined)
ASAP#3 (predefined)
ASAP#4 (predefined)
Free use ASAPs
(max 3 entries)
ASAP#1 (predefined)
ASAP#2 (predefined)
ASAP#3 (predefined)
ASAP#4 (predefined)
Free use ASAPs
(max 3 entries)

1
2
3
4
5..N
1; <trapId>
2; <trapId>
3; <trapId>
4; <trapId>
5..N;
<trapId>
1

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

142/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)
opticsIMSwPackageTable
opticsIMSwPackageCommand
opticsIMSwPackageActivationResult
opticsIMSwPackageActivationDate
opticsIMSwPackageCurrentState
opticsIMSwPackageLabel
opticsIMSwPackageVersion
opticsIMSwPackageOperationalState
opticsIMSwUnitTable
opticsIMSwUnitLabel
opticsIMSwUnitVersion
opticsIMSwUnitSize

Table Entry
Description

EC software unit
OC-R software unit
FPGA-JGIDU (R2.0) software
unit
FPGA-JGIDU (R2.1) software
unit
FPGA-JGRPS software unit
FPGA-GAIA software unit
FPGA-GAIA-EXT software unit

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

FPGA-MEDUSA software unit


(Fast Ethernet)
FPGA-DEDALO software unit
(Gigabit Ethernet)
opticsIMAbnCondAffectedObjectListTabl Max 50 entries
e
opticsIMAbnCondAffectedObjectInstanceId
opticsIMOffNormalDescription

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

Indexes
Value
1..2

1; 1
2; 1
1; 2
2; 2
1; 3
2; 3
1; 4
2; 4
1; 5
2; 5
1; 6
2; 6
1; 7
2; 7
1; 8
2; 8
1; 9
2; 9
1..N

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

143/202

Table Entry
Indexes
Value

Description

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)
opticsIMEFDAllEvents
opticsIMEFDAllTraps
opticsIMEFDAllObjects
tsdimObjectCreationNotification
tsdimObjectDeletionNotification
tsdimAVCNotification
tsdimStateChangeNotification
opticsIMSwdlServerAddress
opticsIMSwdlServerPort
opticsIMSwdlServerUserId
opticsIMSwdlServerPassword
opticsIMSwdlServerRootDir
opticsIMSwdlPercentage
opticsIMSwdlTotalBytes
opticsIMSwdlCurrentSwUnitVersion
opticsIMSwdlCurrentSwUnitLabel
opticsIMSwdlResult
opticsIMNERestartRequest
opticsIMBackupFilename
opticsIMBackupRequestorAddress
opticsIMBackupState
opticsIMRestoreSWVersion
opticsIMRestoreFilename
opticsIMRestoreRequestorAddress
opticsIMRestoreState
opticsIMActiveAbnCond
system
sysDescr
sysLocation
sysName
tsdimSnmpNEMib

ED
WTD

01

It.01

Undefined configuration
Configurations

255
1..72
(note 2)

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

144/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

tsdimLacTable
tsdimLacState
tsdimLacNoResponseTimeOutPeriod
opticsIMAllowedNeConfigurationTypeT
able
opticsIMAllowedNeConfigurationType

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)

Table Entry
Description

Indexes
Value

tsdimSnmpAgtIpAddress
(note 1)
tsdimSnmpAgtIpMask
(note 1)
tsdimSnmpAgtUdpPort
(note 1)
tsdimNeInstallationType
tsdimSdhNeLabel
tsdimInfoModelVersionMajor
tsdimInfoModelVersionMinor
tsdimInfoModelVersionMaintenance
opticsIMNeConfigurationType
opticsIMNeConfigurationTypeId
opticsIMMarket
opticsIMExternalTime
opticsIMNTPStatus
opticsIMMainNTPServerAddress
opticsIMSpareNTPServerAddress
opticsIMNTPServersReachabilityStatus
opticsIMAlarmLossOfSignalRaise
opticsIMAlarmLossOfSignalClear
opticsIMAlarmLossOfFrameRaise
opticsIMAlarmLossOfFrameClear
opticsIMAlarmAisRaise
opticsIMAlarmAisClear
opticsIMAlarmRemoteDefectIndicationRaise
opticsIMAlarmRemoteDefectIndicationClear
opticsIMAlarmCableLOSRaise
opticsIMAlarmCableLOSClear
opticsIMAlarmRxLOSRaise
opticsIMAlarmRxLOSClear
opticsIMAlarmRxFailRaise
opticsIMAlarmRxFailClear
opticsIMAlarmTxFailRaise
opticsIMAlarmTxFailClear
opticsIMAlarmDemLOSRaise
opticsIMAlarmDemLOSClear
opticsIMAlarmDemFailRaise
opticsIMAlarmDemFailClear
opticsIMAlarmTCARaise
opticsIMAlarmTCAClear
opticsIMAlarmUnavailableTimeRaise
opticsIMAlarmUnavailableTimeClear
opticsIMAlarmLossOfAlignmentRaise
opticsIMAlarmLossOfAlignmentClear
opticsIMAlarmPPPFailRaise
opticsIMAlarmPPPFailClear
opticsIMAlarmRemoteNEFailureRaise
opticsIMAlarmRemoteNEFailureClear
opticsIMCommonPmMib
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

145/202

Description

Indexes
Value
1..N

opticsIMFilterHistoryDataTable
Entries created by the
opticsIMFilterHDBeginTimeInterval
managers (max 10 entries)
opticsIMFilterHDEndTimeInterval
opticsIMFilterHDGranularityPeriod
opticsIMFilterHDRowStatus
(note 1)
See Communication and Routing Domain for the Management Functions.

(note 2)
Indeed, the allowed configurations are 48; the missing configurations (24) are those
related to the PSUVAC power supply, which is not more supported in this release; to be compliant to
the release 2.1.1 from this point of view, it has been preferred to maintain the global number of the
configurations (72, as in release 2.1.2), managing the missing configurations.

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

146/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Table Entry

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING DOMAIN

9.1 Functional Description


The association between Point-To-Point IP interface type and supported modes are indicated in the
following table.
Point-To-Point IP Interfaces
Type
Supported Modes
RF
Not used
V.11
DTE
Asynchronous (Codirectional)
G.703
DTE
Asynchronous (Codirectional)
E1/DS1
(note 1)
(note 1)

Mode supported only for framed E1#1 tributary.

All these entries in the opticsIMPointToPointIPTable will be created by the agent as consequence of the
equipment provisioning phase (see Equipment Domain). The managing systems can only
activate/deactivate these interfaces.
Also the entry of the opticsIMLocalEthernetTable will follow the same behaviour. The managing
systems can only activate/deactivate this interface.
The entry related to the backbone OSPF area is automatically created by the agent as consequence of
the equipment provisioning phase and cannot be deleted.
SNMP Manager management
The maximum number of managers connected to the NE is 10.
N.B. The agent answers to the SNMP manager requests (GET and SET) only if the IP address of the
manager is already registered in the opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTable.
There are 2 different ways for a manager to be registered:

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Automatic creation of a row into the opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTable (F-7 function of


Communication&Routing Domain) and tsdimEFDTable (F-1 and F-2 of Support Domain)
without operator intervention.
The row into opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTable is created using the first free index in the range
1..10 specified by manager.
These rows are constantly updated (deleted/recreated using an other index) on
connection/disconnection events and are not stored in the persistent memory.
A polling mechanism is implemented both on managing system and on NE in order to
discover connection/disconnection manager-agent events.
In the creation request for opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTable the following information are provided:
o Manager IP address as known at manager side (opticsIMMgrPollingIpAddress).

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

147/202

o
o

UDP port of the local SNMP notification daemon application. For an Alcatel manager
this is the SNMP port of the specific proxi-manager (opticsIMMgrPollingUdpPort).
A timeout value to manage the polling mechanism (opticsIMMgrPollingTimeOut).
The manager type that is in registration (opticsIMMgrPollingManagerType) : eml (1)
value for NMS system, localct (4) or remotect (5) values for CT system. These values are
used to trigger the polling mechanism start.

In the creation request for tsdimEFDTable the following information are provided:
o Manager IP address as known at manager side (tsdimEFDDest) to send the
notifications.
o UDP port of the local SNMP notification daemon application to send notifications. For
an Alcatel manager this is the SNMP port of the specific proxi-manager (tsdimEFDPort).
o The
index
on
opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTableof
manager
registered
(tsdimEFDManagerIndex).
o The other informations are fixed values:
tsdimEFDTrapId = all,
tsdimEFDTrapObject = all,
tsdimEFDLowestForWardedSeverity = lowestSeverity,
tsdimEFDIndeterminate = true.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Manual creation of a row into the opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTable and tsdimEFDTable: trusted


manager.
The informations for the creation request are provided directly from operator and sent to NE
by the http interface.
In the NE, the rows are created using the first free index in the range 1..10.
The polling mechanism is not implemented and the rows are stored in the persistent memory
(at NE restart the rows are recreated from information on persistent memory and not recreated
by the manager).

NE side, the rows on opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTable and tsdimEFDTable are created using:


o Manager IP address (opticsIMMgrPollingIpAddress, tsdimEFDDest).
o UDP
port
of
the
local
SNMP
notification
daemon
application
(opticsIMMgrPollingUdpPor, tsdimEFDPort).
o The
manager
type
that
have
to
be
registered
as
persistent
(opticsIMMgrPollingManagerType) : nml (2).
Not provided by operator.
When a manager is registered as type nml, the registration information is written to
the permanent memory (flash card) so that it can be automatically restored (reregistered) after a reboot. The polling mechanism is not started.
o The timeout value (opticsIMMgrPollingTimeOut) can be set to any non zero value.
This timeout value for managers registered as type nml is ignored by the NE (no
polling mechanism).
o The
index
on
opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTable
of
manager
registered
(tsdimEFDManagerIndex).
ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

148/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

The following informations are provided by manager:


o Manager IP address
o UDP port of the local SNMP notification daemon

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

The other informations for tsdimEFDTable are fixed values:


tsdimEFDTrapId = all,
tsdimEFDTrapObject = all,
tsdimEFDLowestForWardedSeverity = lowestSeverity,
tsdimEFDIndeterminate = true.

TMN in frame
In SRS document has been described in details the management of the TMN in frame; briefly, it
consists to insert a 64 Kb/s signal as network management signal (NMS or TMN) to transmit remotely
this type of information along the E1#1 route (only the E1#1 tributary is enabled to do this; the
limitation is due to the hardware implementation (asic PEGASO)) in one of the time slots (the operator
chooses the time slot in the range 131 (but 16 (reserved slot))).
This AWY release is based on new MIB version (4.04) to support this feature; a specific object has
been introduced.
Regarding the previous one (AWY 2.1.1), the F-1.145 and F-1.146 MFs (in the RADIO DOMAIN) are
not more supported; the new functions are labeled F-3.36p e F-3.37p introduced in SDH/PDH
TRANSMISSION DOMAIN (the new object e1pPITTPTimeSlotTMN for the new feature belongs to the
mentioned domain, but the functionality is referred to the COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING
DOMAIN).
No alarm is required.

9.2 Management Functions


The following table lists the Communication and Routing management functions supported in this
release (see [7]).

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function
IP
Management

Routing SN Function Description


MP
If
F-1. Request IP Address
P This function allows a managing system to request the
Configuration
managed system address.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the IP address, mask and UDP
of the managed system.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following scalar objects (defined in
TSDIM-SNMPNE-MIB):
tsdimSnmpAgtIpAddress
tsdimSnmpAgtIpMask
tsdimSnmpAgtUdpPort
Note F-1: tsdimSnmpAgtIpMask and tsdimSnmpAgtIpUdpPort objects are not supported.
F-2. Request OSPF
Y This function allows a managing system to request
Configuration
information about the OSPF protocol routing information.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the different OSPF Area
configurations.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following opticsIMOspfAreaTable
columnar objects:
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

149/202

F-4. Delete IP Static


Routing Information

F-5. Request IP Static


Routing Information

F-6. Request Routing


Information

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

150/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-3. Create IP Static


Routing Information

opticsIMOspfAreaId
opticsIMOspfAreaIpAddress
opticsIMOspfAreaIpMask
opticsIMOspfAreaStubFlag
This function allows a managing system to define different IP
static routing paths.
Scope
This function permits to create an IP static routing object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
the
following
opticsIMIpStaticRoutingInfoTable columnar object:
opticsIMIpStaticIpAddress
opticsIMIpStaticIpMask
opticsIMIpStaticDefGateway
opticsIMIpStaticInterfaceIndex
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to
createAndGo value.
This function allows a managing system to terminate different
IP routing path objects.
Scope
This function permits to delete an IP routing path object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to destroy
value.
This function allows a managing system to request different IP
static routing paths.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve an IP static routing object.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following
opticsIMIpStaticRoutingInfoTable columnar object:
opticsIMIpStaticIpAddress
opticsIMIpStaticIpMask
opticsIMIpStaticDefGateway
opticsIMIpStaticInterfaceIndex
opticsIMIpStaticRowStatus
This function allows a managing system to retrieve
information about all IP routing paths, both static and
dynamic.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve data related to all IP routing
path objects.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following opticsIMIpRoutingTable
columnar objects:
opticsIMIpRoutingDestIpAddress
opticsIMIpRoutingDestIpMask
opticsIMIpRoutingDefGateway
opticsIMIpRoutingMetricValue
opticsIMIpRoutingRouteAge

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

opticsIMIpRoutingRouteType
opticsIMIpRoutingProtocol
opticsIMIpRoutingLocalPtpInterface
F-12. Condition IP
P This function allows a managing system to condition the
Address
managed system address.
Scope
This function permits to condition the IP address, mask and
UDP of the managed system.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following scalar objects (defined in
TSDIM-SNMPNE-MIB):
tsdimSnmpAgtIpAddress
tsdimSnmpAgtIpMask
tsdimSnmpAgtUdpPort
Note F-12: tsdimSnmpAgtIpMask and tsdimSnmpAgtIpUdpPort objects are not supported.
F-13. Create OSPF Area
Y This function allows a managing system to define different
OSPF areas.
Scope
This function permits to create different OSPF Areas.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following opticsIMOspfAreaTable
columnar objects:
opticsIMOspfAreaIpAddress
opticsIMOspfAreaIpMask
opticsIMOspfAreaStubFlag
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to
createAndGo value.
F-14. Delete OSPF Area
Y This function allows a managing system to delete OSPF areas.
Scope
This function permits to delete OSPF Areas.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object of the
opticsIMOspfAreaTable to destroy value.
F-15. Condition OSPF
Y This function allows a managing system to condition
Area
information about the OSPF area protocol routing
information.
Scope
This function permits to condition the different OSPF Area
configurations.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following opticsIMOspfAreaTable
columnar objects:
opticsIMOspfAreaIpMask
opticsIMOspfAreaStubFlag
Function
Manager SN Function Description
Polling Management
MP
If
F-7. Create Manager
Y This function allows a managing system to define its polling
Polling Information
information
Scope
This function permits to create an object containing the
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

151/202

F-9. Request Manager


Polling Information

F-10. Request Polled


Information

F- 48. Condition Timeout


Polling

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

152/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-8. Delete Manager


Polling Information

information needed to manage the manager polling


functionality.
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
the
following
opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTable columnar object:
opticsIMMgrPollingIpAddress
opticsIMMgrPollingUdpPort
opticsIMMgrPollingTimeOut
opticsIMMgrPollingManagerType
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to
createAndWait value.
This function allows a managing system to terminate its
polling information object.
Scope
This function permits to delete a polling information object.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to destroy
value.
This function allows a managing system to request its polling
information.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve its polling information object.
Service Used
SNMP-GET
on
the
following
opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTable columnar object:
opticsIMMgrPollingIpAddress
opticsIMMgrPollingUdpPort
opticsIMMgrPollingTimeOut
opticsIMMgrPollingManagerType
opticsIMMgrPollingRowStatus
This function allows a managing system to request its owns
polled information.
Scope
This function permits to retrieve the polled information object
related to a particular Manager.
Each Manager could read its owns polled information, such
as each manager could have its owns NotificationId and Time
associated to it.
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following opticsIMInfoPolledTable
columnar object:
opticsIMInfoIndex
opticsIMInfoLastAlarmNotificationId
opticsIMInfoLastAlarmTime
opticsIMInfoLastEventNotificationId
opticsIMInfoLastEventTime
opticsIMInfoLastGenEventNotificationId (if supported)
opticsIMInfoLastGenEventTime (if supported)
This function allows a managing system to change the polling
timeout value.

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Scope
This function permits to change the polling timeout value. This
operation is feasible also in case the RowStatus is Active.
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTable
columnar object:
- opticsIMMgrPollingTimeOut

Function Local Ethernet SN Function Description


Management
MP
If
F-16. Create Local
N This function allows a managing system to create a local
Ethernet
ethernet interface.
Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMROU-MIB: opticsIMLocalEthernetTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following columnar objects:
opticsIMLocalEthernetIpAddress
opticsIMLocalEthernetIpMask
opticsIMLocalEthernetIpRoutingProtocol
opticsIMLocalEthernetOspfAreaPointer
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to
createAndGo value.
F-17. Delete Local
N This function allows a managing system to delete a local
ethernet interface.
Ethernet
Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMROU-MIB: opticsIMLocalEthernetTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to destroy
value.
F-33. Activate Local
Y This function allows a managing system to activate a local
Ethernet
ethernet interface.
Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMROU-MIB: opticsIMLocalEthernetTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to active
value.
F-34. Deactivate Local
Y This function allows a managing system to deactivate a local
Ethernet
ethernet interface.
Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMROU-MIB: opticsIMLocalEthernetTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object
to
nonInService value.
F-18. Request Local
Y This function allows a managing system to request
Ethernet Information
information about local ethernet interfaces.
Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMROU-MIB: opticsIMLocalEthernetTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following columnar objects:
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

153/202

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

154/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel
1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

opticsIMLocalEthernetMacAddress
opticsIMLocalEthernetIpAddress
opticsIMLocalEthernetIpMask
opticsIMLocalEthernetIpRoutingProtocol
opticsIMLocalEthernetOspfAreaPointer
F-19. Condition Local
Y This function allows a managing system to condition the
Ethernet Information
parameters related to local ethernet interface.
Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMROU-MIB: opticsIMLocalEthernetTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following columnar objects:
opticsIMLocalEthernetIpAddress
opticsIMLocalEthernetIpMask
opticsIMLocalEthernetIpRoutingProtocol
opticsIMLocalEthernetOspfAreaPointer
Note F-19: Allowed values for routing protocol are: none, ospf.
Function
Point-to-Point SN Function Description
IP
Interface MP
Management
If
F-20. Create Point-ToN This function allows a managing system to create a point-toPoint IP Interface
point IP interface.
Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMROU-MIB: opticsIMPointToPointIPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following columnar objects:
opticsIMIpPointToPointIPType
opticsIMIpPointToPointIPMode
opticsIMIpPointToPointIPRoutingProtocol
opticsIMIpPointToPointIPOspfAreaPointer
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to
createAndGo value.
F-21. Delete Point-ToN This function allows a managing system to delete a point-toPoint IP Interface
point IP interface.
Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMROU-MIB: opticsIMPointToPointIPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to destroy
value.
F-22. Request Point-ToY This function allows a managing system to request
Point IP Information
information about a point-to-point IP interface.
Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMROU-MIB: opticsIMPointToPointIPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on the following columnar objects:
opticsIMPointToPointIPType
opticsIMPointToPointIPMode
opticsIMPointToPointIPRoutingProtocol
opticsIMPointToPointIPOspfAreaPointer
opticsIMPointToPointIPRemoteAddress
F-23. Condition PointY This function allows a managing system to condition the

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

To-Point IP Information

parameters related to a point-to-point IP interface.


Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMROU-MIB: opticsIMPointToPointIPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET
on
the
following
opticsIMIpPointToPointIPTable columnar objects:
opticsIMPointToPointIPMode
opticsIMPointToPointIPRoutingProtocol
opticsIMPointToPointIPOspfAreaPointer
Note F-23: opticsIMPointToPointIPMode object can assumes only the values:
RF: notUsed
V.11: DTE/Asynchronous (Codirectional)
G.703: DTE/Asynchronous (Codirectional) or E1#1 tributary.
Note F-23: Allowed values for routing protocol are: none, ospf.
F-24. Activate a PointY This function allows a managing system to activate a point-toTo-Point IP Interface
point IP interface.
Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMROU-MIB: opticsIMPointToPointIPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to active
value.
F-25. Deactivate a
Y This function allows a managing system to deactivate a pointPoint-To-Point IP
to-point IP interface.
Scope
Interface
OPTICSIM-COMMROU-MIB: opticsIMPointToPointIPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on RowStatus columnar object to
notInService value.
F-26. Report Point-ToY This function allows a managed system to report the alarms
Point IP Interface Alarms
related t a point-to-point IP interface.
Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMROU-MIB: opticsIMPointToPointIPTable
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP on:
opticsIMAlarmLossOfSignalRaise/Clear
opticsIMAlarmPPPFailRaise/Clear
Note F-26: LOS for G.703 NMS interface (DTE and asynchronous modes only) and PPP fail
alarms.
F-27. Request Point-ToY This function allows a managing system to request the ASAP
Point IP Interface ASAP
Pointer associated a point-to-point IP interface.
Pointer
Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMROU-MIB: opticsIMPointToPointIPTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMIpPointToPointIPAsapPointer.
F-28. Condition PointY This function allows a managing system to condition the
To-Point IP Interface
ASAP Pointer associated a point-to-point IP interface.
ASAP Pointer
Scope
OPTICSIM-COMMROU-MIB: opticsIMPointToPointIPTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMIpPointToPointIPAsapPointer.

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

155/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function
Management

LAPD SN Function Description


MP
If
F-xx All the functions
N

Function
IP
Management

Tunnel SN Function Description


MP
If
F-xx All the functions
N
Function CLNP
Management

Tunnel SN Function Description


MP
If
F-xx All the functions
N

9.3 Supported Objects and Naming Rules


The SNMP tables (with the columnar objects) and the scalar objects supported by this release are
provided in the following table.
For each table the indexes values of all the supported entries are provided too.
The general naming rules for the Communication and Routing objects are defined in [17].
Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)

Table Entry
Description

Indexes
Value

opticsIMCommRouMib

ED
WTD

01

It.01

Entries created by the managers 1..N


(max 10 entries)

Entries created as consequence


of managers actions
(max 10 entries)

1..N

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

156/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTable
opticsIMMgrPollingIpAddress
opticsIMMgrPollingUdpPort
opticsIMMgrPollingTimeOut
opticsIMMgrPollingManagerType
opticsIMMgrPollingRowStatus
opticsIMInfoPolledTable
opticsIMInfoIndex
opticsIMInfoLastAlarmNotificationId
opticsIMInfoLastAlarmTime
opticsIMInfoLastEventNotificationId
opticsIMInfoLastEventTime
opticsIMInfoLastGenEventNotificationId
opticsIMInfoLastGenEventTime

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)
opticsIMOspfAreaTable
opticsIMOspfAreaId
opticsIMOspfAreaIpAddress
opticsIMOspfAreaIpMask
opticsIMOspfAreaStubFlag
opticsIMOspfAreaRowStatus
opticsIMLocalEthernetTable
opticsIMLocalEthernetIpAddress
opticsIMLocalEthernetIpMask
opticsIMLocalEthernetRoutingProtocol
opticsIMLocalEthernetOspfAreaPointer
opticsIMLocalEthernetRowStatus
opticsIMPointToPointIPTable
opticsIMPointToPointIPType
opticsIMPointToPointIPMode
opticsIMPointToPointIPRoutingProtocol
opticsIMPointToPointIPOspfAreaPointer
opticsIMPointToPointIPRemoteAddress
opticsIMPointToPointIPRowStatus
opticsIMPointToPointIPAsapIndex
opticsIMIpStaticRoutingInfoTable
opticsIMIpStaticIpAddress
opticsIMIpStaticIpMask
opticsIMIpStaticDefGateway
opticsIMIpStaticInterfaceIndex
opticsIMIpStaticRowStatus
opticsIMIpRoutingInfoTable
opticsIMIpRoutingDestIpMask
opticsIMIpRoutingDefGateway
opticsIMIpRoutingMetricValue
opticsIMIpRoutingRouteAge
opticsIMIpRoutingRouteType
opticsIMIpRoutingProtocol
opticsIMIpRoutingLocalPtpInterface

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

Table Entry
Indexes
Value
Entries created by the managers 0 = backbone
(max 1+3 entries)
1..N
Description

RF
V.11
G.703

1
2
3

Entries created by the managers <IP address>

Entries created by the agent on


managers GET request

<IP address>

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

157/202

10.1 Functional Description


One auxiliary and one EOW interface are supported by ULS NE. The related entries will be created by
the agent during the provisioning phase (see Equipment domain).
The default value for the opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidType columnar object is disabled. The supported
values for this object are the following:
v11Contradir64Kb
g703-64Kb
v11Codir64Kb
v11Asynch9600b
v11Asynch4800b
v28Asynch9600b
v28Asynch4800b

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

10 OVERHEAD DOMAIN

10.2 Management Functions


The following table lists the Overhead management functions supported in this release (see [14]).
EOW Phonic Parameters
Phonic SN Function Description
MP
If
F-1.1 Request EOW
Y This management function allow the managing system to
Phone Number
request the phone number associated to an Engineering
Order Wire.
Scope
OPTICSIM-OH-MIB: opticsIMEowDTMFTTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on: opticsIMEowDTMFTTPBidPhoneNumber
F-1.2 Condition EOW
Y This management function allow the managing system to
Phone Number
condition the phone number associated to an Engineering
Order Wire.
Scope
OPTICSIM-OH-MIB: opticsIMEowDTMFTTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on: opticsIMEowDTMFTTPBidPhoneNumber
F- 1.3 Condition EOW
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Party Line
enable/disable the Engineering Order Wire party line feature
on NMS/User channel port.
The managing system has to provided in the request the index
of EOW table (identified by ifIndex), the port type of NMS port
(nms-v11 or nms-g703)/User channel and the port identifier
(identified
by
opticsIMPointToPointIPId
of
opticsIMPointToPointIPTable).
ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

158/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function EOW
Parameters

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Scope
OPTICSIM-OH-MIB: opticsIMEowPartyLineTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on: opticsIMEowPartyLineEnabled
Note F-1.3: This function is supported to allow the enable/disable of the EOW party line feature
on User channel port.
F- 1.4 Request EOW
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Party Line
request if the Engineering Order Wire party line feature on
NMS port is enabled or disabled.
Scope
OPTICSIM-OH-MIB: opticsIMEowPartyLineTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on: opticsIMEowPartyLineEnabled
Auxiliary Interfaces
Function Configuration

SN Function Description
MP
If
F-1.10 Request Auxiliary Y This management function allow the managing system to
Interface Type
request the auxiliary interface type.
Scope
OPTICSIM-OH-MIB: opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on: opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidType
F-1.11 Condition
Y This management function allow the managing system to
Auxiliary Interface Type
condition the auxiliary interface type.
Scope
OPTICSIM-OH-MIB: opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on: opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidType
F-1.13 Request Auxiliary Y This management function allows a managing system to
request the ASAP Pointer associated to the auxiliary interface.
ASAP Pointer
Scope
OPTICSIM-OH-MIB: opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidAsapIndex
F-1.14 Condition
Y This management function allows a managing system to
configure the ASAP Pointer associated to the auxiliary
Auxiliary ASAP Pointer
interface.
Scope
OPTICSIM-OH-MIB: opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidAsapIndex

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function TP Status

SN Function Description
MP
If
F-1.15 Request Auxiliary Y This management function allows the managing system to
request the operational state of the auxiliary interface.
Operational State
Scope
OPTICSIM-OH-MIB: opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidTable
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

159/202

Function Notification

SN Function Description
MP
If
F- 1.12 Report Auxiliary
Y This management function allows a managed system to report
Physical Interface Alarms
transmission alarms related to auxiliary physical interfaces.
Scope
OPTICSIM-OH-MIB: opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-TRAP:
opticsIMAlarmLossOfSignalRaise
opticsIMAlarmLossOfSignalClear
Note F-1.12: LOS for G.703 64kb/s.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F- 1.16 Request Auxiliary


Connection Status

Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidOperationalState
This management function allows the managing system to
request if the auxiliary interface is involved in OH cross
connection (0 value indicates no cross connection on
auxiliary port; values different from 0 indicates that auxiliary
port is involved on cross connection).
Scope
OPTICSIM-OH-MIB: opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET
on:
opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidCrossConnectIdentifier

Overhead Bytes

F- XX. All the functions.


Function TP Status
F- XX. All the functions.

ED
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
MP
If
N
SN Function Description
MP
If
N

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

160/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function Configuration

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

10.3 Supported Objects and Naming Rules


The SNMP tables (with the columnar objects) and the scalar objects supported by this release are
provided in the following table.
For each table the indexes values of all the supported entries are provided too.
The general naming rules for the Overhead objects are defined in [17].
Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)

Table Entry
Configuratio
n

Description

Indexes
Value

opticsIMOverheadMib
opticsIMEowDTMFTTPBidTable
All
opticsIMEowDTMFTTPBidPhoneNumber
opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidTable
All
opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidType
opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidAsapIndex
opticsIMAuxiliaryPITTPBidOperationalStat
e
opticsIMEowPartyLineTable
All
opticsIMEowPartyLineEnabled

EOW port

Auxiliary port

301

EOW on V.11
NMS port

1;
nms-v11;
1 (note 1)

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

(note 1)
The NMS-V11 port (number 1) has to be intend as auxiliary interface; in this case, it is
referred to user channel.

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

161/202

11.1 Functional Description


The functions described in this section are used to control and monitor the test operations. All the
entries related to the loopbacks tables will be created by the agent as consequence of the equipment
provisioning phase (see Equipment Domain). The managing systems can only activate/deactivate the
loopbacks.
Only the entries related to RF loopback are created according also to the ODU/s type discovered.
In case of ODU v2 type, the entry related to the RF loopback has not to be created.
In this way, the manager cannot activate this RF loopback on ODU v2 type.
In 1+1 configurations, each ODU supportes his own specific loopbacks according to ODU type.
In case of ODU substitution, the RF loopback entries have to be deleted/created according to the new
ODU type.
If no ODU/s are connected, all the loopback entries (also the RF) have to be created. When a ODU v2
is connected, then the RF loopback entries have to be deleted.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

11 TEST DOMAIN

The loopback points supported are the following:


IDU

Near-End Tributary Loopback Line Local only for E3/DS3


This loopback can be activated on each PDH tributary (Tx side).
According to the frame structure configuration, this loopback refers to instances of the following
table: opticsIME1pPITTPTable (currently, only E1 tributaries are supported).

Far-End Tributary Loopback Internal


This loopback can be activated on each PDH tributary (Rx side) of the Far-End NE.
According to the frame structure configuration, this loopback refers to instances of the following
table: opticsIME1PathTTPTable (currently, only E1 tributaries are supported). This type of
loopback can be activated/deactivated only by a manager connected to the Far-End NE. A
manager directly connected to the NE (Near-End NE) can only read the status of this loopback.
Far-End tributary loopback cannot be activated if the remote transmitter is squelched (remote
Tx mute active).

Near-End IDU Cable Loopback Line Local only


This loopback can be activated on instances of opticsIMCoderTTPTable.

Near-End ODU Cable Loopback Line Local only


This loopback can be activated on instances of opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable. In order to
distinguish this loopback point from the Internal RF one, the loopbackPointAdditionalDefinition
object has to be used.

(note 1)
Near-End RF Loopback Line Local only
This loopback can be activated on instances of opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable. In order to
distinguish this loopback point from the Internal ODU Cable one, the
loopbackPointAdditionalDefinition object has to be used.

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

162/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

ODU

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

N.B. The loopbacks types defined as Local only can be requested only by managers declared as
local act in the related MgrPollingManagerType object of the polling table.
The modality of work of all of these types of loopbacks is Loop-And-Continue.
Not supported in case an ODU v2 (4QAM or 4/16QAM) is provisioned.

(note 1)

11.2 Management Functions


The following table lists the Test management functions supported in this release (see [13]).
Function Configuration
F-1 Request Loopback
Configuration

F-2 Condition Loopback


Activation

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-3 Request NearEnd/Far-End Loopback


Type

F-4 Request Loopback


Timer Configuration

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

SN Function Description
MP
If
Y This management function allow the managing system to
request the chracteristics (TP to be tested, direction and
behaviour of the loopback) and the activation status (active or
not active) of the loopback.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TEST-MIB: opticsIMLoopbackTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
loopbackPointObjectInstance
loopbackDirectionality
loopbackPointAdditionalDefinition
loopbackBehaviour
loopbackActivation
Y This management function allow the managing system to
activate a loopback test.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TEST-MIB: opticsIMLoopbackTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on:
loopbackActivation
Y This management function allow the managing system to
request if the loopback is referred to the Near-End or Far-End
NE and the type of managers that can require the loopback
activation.
This function will be used when a loopbacks management on
radio link base is supported.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TEST-MIB: opticsIMLoopbackExtTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
loopbackNEType
loopbackAllowedManager
N This management function allow the managing system to
request the activation date (if loopback is yet activated) and
the time during the loopback stays active.
Scope
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

163/202

11.3 Supported Objects and Naming Rules


The Test SNMP tables, columnar and scalar objects supported by this release are the following:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-5 Condition Loopback


Timeout

OPTICSIM-TEST-MIB: opticsIMLoopbackTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
SNMP-GET on:
loopbackActivationDate
loopbackTimeoutPeriod
This management function allow the managing system to
configure the timer for loopback activation.
Scope
OPTICSIM-TEST-MIB: opticsIMLoopbackTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on loopbackTimeoutPeriod

opticsIMTestMib
opticsIMLoopbackTable
loopbackPointObjectInstance
loopbackDirectionality
loopbackPointAdditionalDefinition
loopbackBehaviour
loopbackActivation
opticsIMLoopbackExtTable
loopbackNEType
loopbackAllowedManager
The general naming rules of the Test objects are defined in [17]. The following tables provides the list
of loopback points, with the associated characteristics, supported in the current release.
1+0 Configurations

ED
WTD

01

It.01

TP
Index
1xx01
(note 1)
1yy01
(note 2)
20101
2xx01
(note 1)
2yy01
(note 2)
20101

NE
Type

Additional
Def.

nearEnd <trib>
Port#xx
<trib>
Port#yy
nearEnd IDU Cable
farEnd
<trib>
Port#xx
<trib>
Port#yy
nearEnd ODU Cable

Directionali
ty
externalLine
externalLine
externalLine
internal
internal
externalLine

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

164/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Loopbac
Object Instance
k
TP
Table
Table
Indexes
1; 1..16 opticsIME1pPITTPTable
(note 6)
1; 36..51 opticsIME1pPITTPTable
(note 6)
1; 17
opticsIMCoderTTPTable
1; 18..33 opticsIME1PathTTPTable
(note 6)
1; 52..67 opticsIME1PathTTPTable
(note 6)
1; 34
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1; 35
(note 5)
1;
opticsIME1PathTTPTable
101..132 (note 6)
(note 4)

RF
2zz01
nearEnd <trib>
(note 3)
Port#zz

(note 1)

xx= 01..16

(note 2)

yy= 17..32

(note 3)

zz= 01..32

(note 4)

This loopback cannot be activated/deactivated by the manager.

(note 5)

Not supported when the ODU v2 is provisioned.

externalLine
internal

(note 6)
This TPTable with this TP Index is valid also in 1+1 without EPS MUX protection
configuration.
1+1 Configurations

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Loopback
Table
Indexes
Common;
1..16
Common;
36..51
Common;
18..33
Common;
52..67
Common;
101..132
(note 4)
1; 17
1; 34
1; 35
(note 5)
0; 17
0; 34
0; 35

Object Instance
TP
Table
opticsIME1pPITTPTable
opticsIME1pPITTPTable
opticsIME1PathTTPTable
opticsIME1PathTTPTable
opticsIME1PathTTPTable

NE
Additional
TP
Type
Def.
Index
nearEnd <trib>
1xx99
(note 1)
Port#xx
1yy99
<trib>
(note 2)
Port#yy
2xx99
farEnd
<trib>
(note 1)
Port#xx
2yy99
<trib>
(note 2)
Port#yy
2zz99
nearEnd <trib>
(note 3)
Port#zz

internal
internal
internal

nearEnd IDU Cable


nearEnd ODU Cable
RF

externalLine
externalLine
externalLine

opticsIMCoderTTPTable
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable

20100
20100

nearEnd IDU Cable


nearEnd ODU Cable
RF

externalLine
externalLine
externalLine

(note 2)

yy= 17..32

(note 3)

zz= 01..32

(note 4)

This loopback cannot be activated/deactivated by the manager.

WTD

externalLine

20101
20101

xx= 01..16

ED

externalLine

opticsIMCoderTTPTable
opticsIMRadioPDHTTPBidTable

(note 1)

NTIAL

Directionali
ty

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

165/202

ED

WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

166/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

(note 5)
Not supported when the ODU v2 is provisioned.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

12 SDH/PDH PERFORMANCE MONITORING DOMAIN


12.1 Functional Description
Performance monitoring of the radio hop and link sections are supported in the current release. The
link section quality monitoring can be activated only in case of 1+1 with hitless configurations (in all
the other configurations hop and link sections provide the same quality), the related monitoring point
follows the position of the EPS Rx switch.
In 1+1 with hitless configuration if the Extension unit is missing or switched off, and also in case the
EPS lockout is active, then the radio link section and the hop section of the main signal provide the
same quality (in this case the EPS switch is active on the main channel due to the missing of spare
channel and the primitives to use for performance monitoring are taken from Pegaso2 ASIC (when the
working mode is R2.0) or JGIDU FPGA (when the working mode is R2.1) on Main unit).
Both these types of PM support the same counters:
Errored Seconds
Severly Errored Seconds
Background Block Error
Unavailable Seconds
The primitive used in ULS NE for the hop section quality monitoring is the Reed-Solomon (RS) decoder
(block size: 2040 bits). The following table provides, for each frame structure, the main features useful
to define a SES.

Gross bit rate


[MHz]
RS Blocks
number/sec.
SES Threshold
(note 1)

32E1
78,336

16E1
39,168

8E1
19,584

4E1
9,792

2E1
4,896

38400

19200

9600

4800

2400

11520

5760

2880

1440

720

(note 1) According to ITU-T G.826 a second is declared Severely Errored Second if it is a second
period with one or more than 30 % of errored blocks or at least one defect.
The link section quality monitoring is obtained using the same primitive and then the same counters of
the hop section active from RPS point of view.
The list of monitoring points is given in the following table.
PM Point
TP Table
opticsIMPdhFrameHopCurrentDataTable

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

opticsIMPdhFrameLinkCurrentDataTable

TP index
20101
20100
20199

Configuration
All the configurations
All the 1+1 configurations
All the 1+1 configurations

All the entries related to the performance monitoring tables will be created by the agent as
consequence of the equipment provisioning phase (see Equipment Domain). The managing systems
can only activate/deactivate the monitoring.
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

167/202

12.2 Management Functions


The following tables list the PM management functions supported in this release (see [11]).

SDH Performance Monitoring Measurement Collection


Function
F-x.xx All the functions

SN Function Description
MP
If
N

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

The all-zeroes 15 minutes intervals are always suppressed. By convention, the value assumed by
xxxSuppressedIntervals columnar objects to indicate all-zeroes suppression is (2^32)-1. Instead, the
all-zeroes 24 hours intervals are not suppressed (xxxSuppressedIntervals = 0).

PDH Frame Performance Monitoring Measurement Collection

Current Data

=>

opticsIMPdhFrameHopCurrentDataTable
opticsIMPdhFrameLinkCurrentDataTable

History Data

=>

opticsIMPdhFrameHopHistoryDataTable
opticsIMPdhFrameLinkHistoryDataTable

Threshold Data

=>

opticsIMPdhFrameHopThresholdDataTable
opticsIMPdhFrameLinkThresholdDataTable

Function Creation of PDH SN Function Description


Frame
and
Tributary MP
Current Data
If
F-4.1 Create CD Entry
N This management function permits to allocate one CD entry.
The management system has to indicate in the creation
request:
1)
the monitoring point which it is associated to
(indicated by means of ifIndex)
2)
the CD index (pmPdh<Layer>CDIndex), which
indicates the granularity period of the counter (15 min or 24
h) (please refer to [14] for the corresponding values of the CD
index)
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on the following columnar objects (optionally):
pmPdh<Layer>CDMaxSuppressedIntervals
pmPdh<Layer>CDThresholdDataInstance

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

168/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All the functions below apply to:

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

pmPdh<Layer>CDAsapIndex
SNMP-SET on pmPdh<Layer>CDRowStatus columnar object
to createAndGo value
Function Configuration of SN Function Description
PDH Frame and tributary MP
Current Data Mode
If
F-4.3 Request Elapsed
Y This management function permits to request the elapsed time
Time
in the current interval.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on pmPdh<Layer>CDElapsedTime
Note F-4.3: Elapsed time is measured in seconds.
F-4.4 Request
Y This management function permits to request the granularity
Granularity Period
period (15 min or 24 h).
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on pmPdh<Layer>CDGranularityPeriod
F-4.5 Condition Max
N This management function permits to condition the maximum
Suppressed Interval
number of intervals which can be suppressed.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on pmPdh<Layer>CDMaxSuppressedIntervals
F-4.6 Request Max
Y This management function permits to request the Max
Suppressed Interval
Suppressed Interval.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on pmPdh<Layer>CDMaxSuppressedIntervals
F-4.8 Request Number of Y This management function permits to request the Number of
Suppressed Intervals
Suppressed Intervals.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on pmPdh<Layer>CDNumSuppressedIntervals
F-4.9 Request Suspect
Y This management function permits to request whether the
Interval Flag
current data is suspect or not.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on pmPdh<Layer>CDSuspectIntervalFlag
F-4.10 Reset Suspect
N This management function permits to reset the Suspect Interval
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

169/202

F-4.13 Reset PM Data


Collection

F-4.2 Activate CD Entry

F-4.14 Deactivate CD
Entry

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

170/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-4.11 Request Start By


OS

Flag.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET
to
default
value
on
pmPdh<Layer>CDSuspectIntervalFlag
This management function permits to identify the
Management System which started the measurement.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on pmPdh<Layer>CDStartByOS
This management function permits to reset to 0 the PM Data
Collection. The following counters can be reset:
BBE
ES
SES
UAS
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET to default Value on:
- pmPdh<Layer>CDSes
- pmPdh<Layer>CDUas
- pmPdh<Layer>CDBbe
- pmPdh<Layer>CDEs
This management function permits to activate one CD entry.
It can be used:
in case the CD is deactivated by the Agent (e.g. if TD
pointer does not point to an existing TD) to activate it.
in case CD has been stopped by the Network
Management System, by means of F-4.14, to restart it.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on pmPdh<Layer>CDRowStatus columnar object
to active value
This management function permits to deactivate one CD entry
to stop the counters.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on pmPdh<Layer>CDRowStatus columnar object
to notInService value

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Interval Flag

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

F-4.16 Condition CD
Asap Pointer

F-4.17 Request CD Asap


Pointer

This management function permits to set the ASAP Pointer


related to a Threshold cross alarm of a CD entry.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on pmPdh<Layer>CDAsapIndex
This management function permits to request the ASAP Pointer
related to a Threshold cross alarm of a CD entry.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on pmPdh<Layer>CDAsapIndex

Function Request of PDH SN Function Description


Frame
and
Tributary MP
Current Data
If
F-4.12 Request PM Data
Y This management function permits to Request PM Data
Collection
Collection. The following counters can be retrieved:
BBE
ES
SES
UAS
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
- pmPdh<Layer>CDSes
- pmPdh<Layer>CDUas
- pmPdh<Layer>CDBbe
- pmPdh<Layer>CDEs

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function Release of PDH SN Function Description


Frame
and
Tributary MP
Current Data
If
F-4.15 Delete CD Entry
N This management function permits to delete one CD entry.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on pmPdh<Layer>CDRowStatus columnar object
to destroy value
Function Report of PDH SN Function Description
Frame and Tributary PM MP
Alarms
If
F-4.18 Report CD Alarms Y This management function permits to report TCA and UAT
alarms.
Scope
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

171/202

Function Request of PDH SN Function Description


Frame
and
Tributary MP

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

172/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function Configuration of SN Function Description


PDH
Frame
and MP
Tributary History Data
If
F-5.1 Request Elapsed
Y This management function permits to request the elapsed time
Time
in the current interval.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>HistoryDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on pmPdh<Layer>HDElapsedTime
F-5.2 Request
Y This management function permits to request the granularity
Granularity Period
period (15 min or 24 h).
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>HistoryDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on pmPdh<Layer>HDGranularityPeriod
F-5.4 Request Number of Y This management function permits to request the Number of
Suppressed Intervals
Suppressed Intervals.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>HistoryDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on pmPdh<Layer>HDNumSuppressedIntervals
F-5.5 Request Suspect
Y This management function permits to request whether the
Interval Flag
History data is suspect or not.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>HistoryDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on pmPdh<Layer>HDSuspectIntervalFlag
F-5.6 Request Start By
N This management function permits to identify the
Management System which started the measurement.
OS
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>HistoryDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on pmPdh<Layer>HDStartByOS

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
opticsIMAlarmThresholdCrossRaise
opticsIMAlarmThresholdCrossClear
opticsIMAlarmUnavailableTimeRaise
opticsIMAlarmUnavailableTimeClear

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

History Data
F-5.7 Request PM Data
Collection

If
Y

This management function permits to Request PM Data


Collection. The following counters can be retrieved:
BBE
ES
SES
UAS
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>HistoryDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on:
- pmPdh<Layer>HDBbe
- pmPdh<Layer>HDEs
- pmPdh<Layer>HDSes
- pmPdh<Layer>HDUas

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Function Creation of PDH SN Function Description


Frame
and
Tributary MP
Threshold Data
If
F-6.1 Create Threshold
Y This management function permits to allocate one Threshold
Data Entry
Data entry. The management system has to indicate in the
creation request the index for the threshold data entry, which
the management system has previously got from the agent
(GET on opticsIMPdh<Layer>ThrIndexNext).
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>ThresholdDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on opticsIMPdh<Layer>ThrIndexNext
SNMP-SET on pmPdh<Layer>RowStatus columnar object to
createAndGo value
Function Configuration of SN Function Description
PDH
Frame
and MP
Tributary Threshold Data If
F-6.3 Condition PM
Y This management function permits to assign thresholds to PM
Thresholds Assignment
counters.
The thresholds are assigned setting, in the relative CD, the
Threshold Data Instance providing the Threshold values.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on pmPdh<Layer>CDThresholdDataInstance
F-6.4 Request PM
Y This management function permits to request the assignment
Thresholds Assignment
of thresholds to PM counters.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>CurrentDataTable
Service Used
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

173/202

F-6.6 Request PM
Thresholds

F-6.9 Condition
Threshold Data User
Label

F-6.10 Request
Threshold Data User
Label

ED
WTD

01

It.01

SNMP-GET on pmPdh<Layer>CDThresholdDataInstance
This management function permits to configure the thresholds
for PM counters.
The high and low thresholds for the following counters can be
set:
BBE
ES
SES
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>ThresholdDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on
- pmPdh<Layer>BbeHighThr
- pmPdh<Layer>BbeLowThr
- pmPdh<Layer>EsHighThr
- pmPdh<Layer>EsLowThr
- pmPdh<Layer>SesHighThr
- pmPdh<Layer>SesLowThr
This management function permits to request the thresholds
for PM counters.
The high and low thresholds for the following counters can be
read:
BBE
ES
SES
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>ThresholdDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on
- pmPdh<Layer>BbeHighThr
- pmPdh<Layer>BbeLowThr
- pmPdh<Layer>EsHighThr
- pmPdh<Layer>EsLowThr
- pmPdh<Layer>SesHighThr
- pmPdh<Layer>SesLowThr
This management function permits to configure the User Label
associated to a Threshold Data entry.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>ThresholdDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on pmPdh<Layer>UserLabel
This management function permits to request the User Label
associated to a Threshold Data entry.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>ThresholdDataTable

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

174/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-6.5 Condition PM
Thresholds

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Service Used
SNMP-GET on pmPdh<Layer>UserLabel
Function Release of PDH SN Function Description
Frame
and
Tributary MP
Threshold Data
If
F-6.8 Delete Threshold
Y This management function permits to delete one Threshold
Data Entry
Data entry.
Scope
OPTICSIM-PDH-PM-MIB:
opticsIMPdh<Layer>ThresholdDataTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on pmPdh<Layer>RowStatus columnar object to
destroy value

12.3 Supported Objects and Naming Rules


The SNMP tables (with the columnar objects) and the scalar objects supported by this release are
provided in the following table.
For each table the indexes values of all the supported entries are provided too.
The general naming rules for the SDH/PDH Performance Monitoring objects are defined in [17].
Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)

Table Entry
Configuration

Description

Indexes
Value

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

opticsIMPdhPmMib
opticsIMPdhFrameHopCurrentDataTa
ble
pmPdhFrameHopCDElapsedTime
pmPdhFrameHopCDGranularityPeriod
pmPdhFrameHopCDMaxSuppressedInterva
ls
pmPdhFrameHopCDNumSuppressedInterv
als
pmPdhFrameHopCDSuspectIntervalFlag
pmPdhFrameHopCDThresholdDataInstance
pmPdhFrameHopCDSes
pmPdhFrameHopCDUas
pmPdhFrameHopCDBbe
pmPdhFrameHopCDEs
pmPdhFrameHopCDRowStatus
pmPdhFrameHopCDAsapIndex
opticsIMPdhFrameHopHistoryDataTa
ble
pmPdhFrameHopHDElapsedTime
pmPdhFrameHopHDGranularityPeriod

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

All

15 min. Ch#1

All the 1+1

15 min. Ch#0

All

24 h Ch#1

All the 1+1

24 h Ch#0

All

15 min. Ch#1

20101;
1
20100;
1
20101;
2
20100;
2

20101;
1;
period x
(x=1..9
6)

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

175/202

opticsIMPdhFrameHopThresholdData
Table
pmPdhFrameHopSesHighThr
pmPdhFrameHopSesLowThr
pmPdhFrameHopBbeHighThr
pmPdhFrameHopBbeLowThr
pmPdhFrameHopEsHighThr
pmPdhFrameHopEsLowThr
pmPdhFrameHopRowStatus
opticsIMPdhFrameLinkCurrentDataTa
ble
pmPdhFrameLinkCDElapsedTime
pmPdhFrameLinkCDGranularityPeriod
pmPdhFrameLinkCDMaxSuppressedInterval
s
pmPdhFrameLinkCDNumSuppressedInterva
ls
pmPdhFrameLinkCDSuspectIntervalFlag
pmPdhFrameLinkCDThresholdDataInstance
pmPdhFrameLinkCDSes
pmPdhFrameLinkCDUas
pmPdhFrameLinkCDBbe
pmPdhFrameLinkCDEs
pmPdhFrameLinkCDRowStatus
pmPdhFrameLinkCDAsapIndex
opticsIMPdhFrameLinkHistoryDataTa
ble
pmPdhFrameLinkHDElapsedTime
pmPdhFrameLinkHDGranularityPeriod

ED
WTD

01

It.01

Configuration

Description

All the 1+1

15 min. Ch#0

All

24 h Ch#1

All the 1+1

24 h Ch#0

All

15 min

All the 1+1


All the 1+1

All the 1+1

Indexes
Value
20100;
1;
period x
(x=1..9
6)
20101;
2;
period x
(x=1..8)
20100;
2;
period x
(x=1..8)
1..3
(note 1)

24 h

4..6
(note 2)

15 min.
Ch#Common
24 h Ch#Common

20199;
1
20199;
2

15 min.
Ch#Common

20199;
1;
period x
(x=1..9
6)

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

176/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

pmPdhFrameHopHDNumSuppressedInterv
als
pmPdhFrameHopHDSuspectIntervalFlag
pmPdhFrameHopHDSes
pmPdhFrameHopHDUas
pmPdhFrameHopHDBbe
pmPdhFrameHopHDEs

Table Entry

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)

Table Entry
Configuration

pmPdhFrameLinkHDNumSuppressedInterva All the 1+1


ls
pmPdhFrameLinkHDSuspectIntervalFlag
pmPdhFrameLinkHDSes
pmPdhFrameLinkHDUas
pmPdhFrameLinkHDBbe
pmPdhFrameLinkHDEs
opticsIMPdhFrameLinkThresholdData All
Table
pmPdhFrameLinkSesHighThr
pmPdhFrameLinkSesLowThr
pmPdhFrameLinkBbeHighThr
pmPdhFrameLinkBbeLowThr
pmPdhFrameLinkEsHighThr
pmPdhFrameLinkEsLowThr
pmPdhFrameLinkRowStatus

Description
24 h Ch#Common

Indexes
Value
20199;
2;
period x
(x=1..8)

15 min

1..2
(note 1)

24 h

3..4
(note 3)

(note 1)

index value 1 is reserved for default entry not modifiable by managing system.

(note 2)

index value 4 is reserved for default entry not modifiable by managing system.

(note 3)

index value 3 is reserved for default entry not modifiable by managing system.

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

177/202

13.1 Functional Description


The following counters, only for gigabit ethernet data plug-in, which are managed in this release, are:

TRCO (incoming, Rx)

TRCF (incoming, Rx)

TRSEF (incoming, Rx)

TDF

(incoming, Rx)

TTO

(outgoing, Tx)

TTF

(outgoing, Tx)

The supported aggregate counters definitions are the following:

TRCO (Total Received Correct Octets): total number of octects of Ethernet frames received
correctly by the Virtual Ethernet Interface, including Ethernet header characters.

TRCF (Total Received Correct Frames): total number of Ethernet frames received correctly by
the Virtual Ethernet Interface.

TRSEF (Total Received Service Errored Frames): it is the sum of three contributions:
o

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

13 ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MONITORING DOMAIN

dot3StatsAlignmentErrors:
a count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of
octets in length and do not pass the FCS check;

dot3StatsFCSErrors:
a count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of
octets in length, but do not pass the FCS check (note 1);

dot3StatsFrameTooLongs:
number of received Ethernet frames that exceed the MTU

TDF (Total Discarded Frames): total number of Ethernet frames which were chosen to be
discarded due to buffer congestion.

TTO (Total Trasmitted Octets): total number of octets of Ethernet frames transmitted out by the
Virtual Ethernet Interface, including Ethernet header characters.

TTF (Total Trasmitted Frames): total number of Ethernet frames transmitted out by the Virtual
Ethernet interface.

ED
WTD

Only the dot3StatsFCSErrors contribution is considered for this counter.

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

178/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

(note 1)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

13.2 Management Functions


Ethernet Performance Monitoring Measurement Collection
Function
F-x.xx All the functions

Ethernet Counters
Function
F-1.1 Request Incoming
Aggregate

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

SN Function Description
MP
If
N Not supported

SN Function Description
MP
If
P This management function permits to request Incoming
Aggregate maintenance counters and attributes:
TRCO
TRCF
TRCF_Unicast
TRCF_Multicast
TRCF_Broadcast
TRSEF
TDF
RetrieveTime
LastDiscontinuityTimeStamp
Scope
OPTICSIM-ETHPM-MIB: ethAggrMaintRxTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on
- ethAggrMaintRxTRCO
- ethAggrMaintRxTRCF
- ethAggrMaintRxTRCFUnicast
- ethAggrMaintRxTRCFMulticast
- ethAggrMaintRxTRCFBroadcast
- ethAggrMaintRxTRSEF
- ethAggrMaintRxTDF
- ethAggrMaintRxRetrievingTime
- ethAggrMaintRxLastDiscontinuityTimeStamp

Note F-1.1: The TRCF_Unicast, TRCF_Multicast and TRCF_Broadcast are not supported: they are
substituted by the only TRCF counter (it is the sum of the others three).
TRSEF counter: it is the sum of three contributions, but we consider only the dot3StatsFCSErrors
contribution.
The RetrieveTime attribute is useful to count the time since the start of the counters reading
(note 1).
The LastDiscontinuityTimeStamp attribute is not supported.
F-1.3 Request Outgoing
P This management function permits to request Outgoing
Aggregate
Aggregate maintenance counters and attributes:
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

179/202

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

TTO
TTF
TTF_Unicast
TTF_Multicast
TTF_Broadcast
TDF
RetrieveTime
LastDiscontinuityTimeStamp
Scope
OPTICSIM-ETHPM-MIB: ethAggrMaintTxTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET on
- ethAggrMaintTxTTO
- ethAggrMaintTxTTF
- ethAggrMaintTxTTFUnicast
- ethAggrMaintTxTTFMulticast
- ethAggrMaintTxTTFBroadcast
- ethAggrMaintTxTDF
- ethAggrMaintTxRetrievingTime
- ethAggrMaintTxLastDiscontinuityTimeStamp
Note F-1.3: The TTF_Unicast, TTF_Multicast and TTF_Broadcast are not supported: they are
substituted by the only TTF counter (it is the sum of the others three).
The TDF (outgoing) counter is not supported.
The RetrieveTime attribute is useful to count the time since the start of the counters reading
(note 1).
The LastDiscontinuityTimeStamp attribute is not supported.

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

180/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

(note 1)
The two RetrieveTime attributes are referred to Tx and Rx direction, but the time
indication has to be the same: they represent, in fact, the NE time.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

13.3 Supported Objects and Naming Rules


The SNMP tables (with the columnar objects) and the scalar objects supported by this release are
provided in the following table.
For each table the indexes values of all the supported entries are provided too.
The general naming rules for the Ethernet Performance Monitoring objects are defined in [17].
Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)

Table Entry
Configuration

Description

Indexes
Value

opticsIM-EthPM-MIB
ethAggrMaintRxTable
ethAggrMaintRxTRCO
ethAggrMaintRxTRCF
ethAggrMaintRxTRSEF
ethAggrMaintRxTDF
ethAggrMaintRxRetrievingTime
ethAggrMaintTxTable
ethAggrMaintTxTTO
ethAggrMaintTxTTF
ethAggrMaintTxRetrievingTime

Only
with Line port
P4DATASW
(Rx direction)
plug-in
Radio port
(Rx direction)

1xx01
(xx=33..36)
29901

Only
with Line port
P4DATASW
(Tx direction)
plug-in
Radio port
(Tx direction)

1xx01
(xx=33..36)
29901

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

The naming rules are the same ones of the Ethernet Transmission Domain.

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

181/202

The NE can be accessed from a managing system by the SNMP v2/v1 protocol (see 14.1 for details)
or by a telnet, ftp and pshell protocols.
The access by telnet protocol is allowed only to the user telnet with the password telnet-init.
The access by ftp protocol is allowed only to the user ftp with the password ftp.
The access by pshell protocol is allowed only to the user pshell with the password pshell-init.
No user management (creation users, deletion users, change password) is supported for telnet, ftp
and pshell protocols.

14.1 Functional Description (SNMP Interface)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

14 SECURITY DOMAIN

The functions described in this section are used to configure the Security domain for SNMP v2
functionalities.
An user is identified by a username and password. Each user is associated to a predefined profile.
NE scratch behaviour
At installation time (NE scratch),
provisioning, are created.
The initial defaults accounts are:
a) Username: initial
Password: adminadmin
Profile:
administrator

b) Username: Craftperson
Password: craftcraft
Profile:
craftPerson

two predefined default user accounts, to be used for initial


(opticsIMCtUserId)
(opticsIMCtUserPassword)
(opticsIMCtUserRights)
(opticsIMCtUserId)
(opticsIMCtUserPassword)
(opticsIMCtUserRights)

The change of the password of these users is strongly suggested.


Further this initial user, the manager is allowed to create/delete users belonging to the predefined
profiles. The manager is prohibited from creating a user with username that already exists.
The manager is allowed also to change user password (own or of all user by administrator).

All the security SNMP v2 informations (username/password/profile for each user) are stored on NE
database. After the NE reset, these informations are not lost and the opticsIMCtUserEntry are
recreated as before the NE reset.

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

182/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Reset NE behaviour

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

User predefined profiles


The predefined profile are:
Administrator
(both for OS interface and CT/MibBrowser interface)
He/she can do everything on the NE.
He/she can manage security features (to add/remove users or to change own password and of
all users).

Constructor
(only for OS interface)
He/she can do everything on the NE also to access to the Manager List by-passing the RM
chekcs, but he/she has disabled some administration functions: for examples he/she cant add
or remove operators, he/she cant do backup and restore.
This user profile is related only to OS system and so not stored on MIB NE.

Operator
(both for OS interface and CT/MibBrowser interface)
He/she has in charge the operation at network level, not at radio site.
He/she cant add or remove users. He/she can change only own user password.
He/she cannot manage network configuration, only for NTP Configuration, due to dangerous
isolation of NE.
He/she cant do quick configuration, backup/restore, restart NE. Also the provisioning of
equipment is not supported and the operations that require the operator presence on the radio
site.

craftPerson
(only for CT/MibBrowser interface)
He/she has in charge the installation and the maintenance at radio site.
He/she can do everything on NE system, but he/she cant add or remove users. He/she can
change only own user password.

Viewer (both for OS interface and CT/MibBrowser interface)


He/she can only explore the NE.
He/she cant add or remove users. He/she can change own user password

All user predefined profiles can be connected to NE by a F interface (local serial interface) or by a
remote interface.
Mapping user profiles on MIB values

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

The predefined user profiles used on ULS 2.0 NE for SNMP v2 security functionalities are the same for
SNMP v3 security functionalities.
The opticsIMCtUserRights columnar object on opticsIMCtUserTable represents the profile for each user
on SNMP v2.
The following table provides a mapping between the predefined user profiles (as seen on Graphical
User Interface) used for ULS 2.0 NE (the same as defined on SNMP v3) and the values of the
opticsIMCtUserRights object on SNMP v2.
Predefined
profile
administrator
operator
craftPerson
viewer
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

User opticsIMCtUserRights
value
administrator
operator
constructor
viewer
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

183/202

An user is identified by a username. The username identifies an user on NE without ambiguity.


The authentication of the user (username existing on NE and password check ) is performed on NE
from manager requesting the password verification (F-46). Both MIBBrowser interface and CT
interface can perform the user authentication.
The NE rejects username and passwords that do not meet specified complexity parameters.
These complexity parameters are:
Password length: the length must not be less than six (6) characters under any circumstances
and must not be less than eight (8) characters for administrator user profile. Moreover the
password length must not be more than 20 characters.
Password composition: the password must be composed of full ASCII characters set
(UPPER/lower case, numeric and special characters).
Username length: the length must not be more than 20 characters.
System Access control

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

User authentication

The system access control (access to whole NE) is performed in 2 ways, both supported together on
the NE:

Allowing access to NE only to those managers identified by an IP address already registered in


the opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTable (see 9.1 for details). This check is independent from user
authentication. Itis performed on NE for each manager (MIBBrowser or CT or OS interfaces).

Allowing access to NE only to those users that are identified and authenticated. This check is
performed on the managing system by a login procedure.

Resource Access control


The access control to the NE MIB (resources) from a user (authenticated by username and password) is
dependent from his user profile

the access to security tables is checked on NE agent (managed system): the management
functions F-44 (creation new user), F-45 (deletion user) and F-48 (change user password)
require that the user that executes the operation has the administrator associated profile.
For that, the access control to security tables (opticsIMCtUserTable) is ensured both from a
MIBbrowser interface and from a Craft Terminal interface

the access control to the other MIB tables for each profile is not defined on managed system
(NE agent). Its the managing system (the manager) that defines for each user profile the list of
authorized functions enabling or not the related Graphycal User Interface (menu item or
button).
The access control to NE from a Craft Terminal interface is ensured to all MIB tables on NE.
No access control instead for MIBBrowser interface (only for security tables).

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

184/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

There are 2 different behaviour for resource access control policy on SNMP v2:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

NMS behaviour
There is no system access control to NE from a NMS interface. The login procedure on NMS GUI is
related only to access to NMS system.
The resource access control from a NMS interface is ensured to all MIB tables on NE
enabling/disabling related menu item on GUI .
Craft Terminal behaviour
The system access control to NE from a Craft Terminal interface is ensured by a login procedure.
The resource access control from a Craft Terminal interface is ensured to all MIB tables on NE
enabling/disabling related menu item on GUI.
MIBBrowser behaviour
From a MIBBrowser interface, the system acces control is not performed (no login procedure).
Instead, the resource access control is related only to opticsIMCtUserTable. In this way, a MIBBrowser
user cannot access (to modify or to destroy, for instance) to any user on the NE if it doesnt know an
administrator username/password, but can access without control to the other MIB tables (after
manager registration).
Access to security MIB
The opticsIMCtUserTable is not accessible directly by managing system (only to retry all username).
The opticsIMUserOperationTable is used to filter all the security related accesses to
opticsIMCtUserTable.
The SNMP SET operations on opticsIMUserOperationTable are used as a trigger of actual operation
made on opticsIMCtUserTable.
For each Management Function (F-44 to F-49) involving opticsIMUserOperationTable the side affect
(performed by agent) versus opticsIMCtUserTable and the related SNMP return codes are described in
[15].
To
avoid
concurrent
operations
on
opticsIMCtUserTable
only
one
entry
on
opticsIMUserOperationTable is supported. The agent has in charge the entry deletion on
opticsIMUserOperationTable after the end of the operation on opticsIMCtUserTable.

14.2 Management Functions


Function USM
Management

SN
M
PIf
N

Function Description

SN
M
PIf
N

Function Description

Function SNMPv2
SN
Security Management M
PIf

Function Description

F-xx All the functions


Function VACM
Management

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

F-xx All the functions

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

185/202

WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

186/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

ED

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function SNMPv2
SN
Function Description
Security Management M
PIf
F-44 Condition New
Y This management function allows the managing system to
User Creation
create a new user profile in the managed system.
Scope
OPTICSIM-SECURITY-MIB: opticsIMUserOperationTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on
_ opticsIMUserOperationOperation: <userCreation>
_ opticsIMCorollaryUsername: <admin username>
_ opticsIMCorollaryPassword: <admin password>
_ opticsIMUserUsername: <new username>
_ opticsIMUserPassword: <password of the new user>
_ opticsIMUserRights: <user rights>
F-45 Condition User
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Deletion
delete an user profile in the managed system.
Scope
OPTICSIM-SECURITY-MIB: opticsIMUserOperationTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on
_ opticsIMUserOperationOperation: <userDeletion>
_ opticsIMCorollaryUsername: <admin username>
_ opticsIMCorollaryPassword: <admin password>
_ opticsIMUserUsername: <operator username>
F-46 Condition
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Password Verification
require the verification of the content of the
password field.
Scope
OPTICSIM-SECURITY-MIB: opticsIMUserOperationTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on
_ opticsIMUserOperationOperation: <checkPassword>
_ opticsIMUserUsername: <operator username>
_ opticsIMUserPassword: <operator password>
_ opticsIMCtUserRights: <fulfilled with 0 (zero)>
F-47 Condition For
Y This management function allows the managing system to
Password changed By
change the password related to the operator that is executing
User
the request.
Scope
OPTICSIM-SECURITY-MIB: opticsIMUserOperationTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on
_ opticsIMUserOperationOperation:
<changePasswordByUser>
_ opticsIMUserUsername: <operator username>
_ opticsIMUserPassword: <old operator password>
_ opticsIMCorollaryPassword: <new operator password>
F-48 Condition For
Y This management function allows the managing system to
change the password related to an operator .
Password changed By

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Function SNMPv2
SN
Function Description
Security Management M
PIf
Administrator
The operation is made by an operator with Administrator
profile rights.
Scope
OPTICSIM-SECURITY-MIB: opticsIMUserOperationTable
Service Used
SNMP-SET on
_ opticsIMUserOperationOperation:
<changePasswordByAdmin>
_ opticsIMUserUsername: <operator username>
_ opticsIMUserPassword: <new operator password>
_ opticsIMCorollaryUsername: <admin username>
_ opticsIMCorollaryPassword: <admin password>
F-49 Request
Y This management function allows the managing system to get
Username List
the list of all usernames admitted in the
managed system.
Scope
OPTICSIM-SECURITY-MIB: opticsIMCtUserTable
Service Used
SNMP-GET-NEXT on
_ opticsIMCtUserId
_ opticsIMCtUserRights

14.3 Supported Objects and Naming Rules


The SNMP tables (with the columnar objects) and the scalar objects supported by this release are
provided in the following table.
For each table the indexes values of all the supported entries are provided too.
Supported Objects
(Table/Scalar/Trap)

Table Entry
Description

Indexes Values

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

opticsIMSecurityMIB
opticsIMCtUserTable
Max 25 entries
opticsIMCtUserId
opticsIMCtUserPassword
opticsIMCtUserRights
opticsIMCtRowStatus
opticsIMUserOperationTable Only one entry
opticsIMUserOperationOperation
opticsIMUserUsername
opticsIMUserPassword
opticsIMCorollaryUsername
opticsIMCorollaryPassword
opticsIMCtUserRights
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

1..N

(note 1)

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

187/202

ED

WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

188/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

(note 1)
index value 1 and 2 are reserved for default user (1 for initial, 2 for
Craftperson).

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

15 ALARMS
15.1 Alarms Provided by Item HW
URU alarms are not supported.
Legenda:
SA
SAac

NSA

=
=
=

always Service Affecting


Service Affecting when the alarm is present on the active channel,
Not Service Affecting when it is present on the stand-by channel
always Not Service Affecting
Service Affecting Evaluation

Equipment
Type

Equipment
Expected

Main Unit 48/60 V M4860-32


Range Supply
Main Unit 24/60 V M2460-32
Range Supply

Alarm
Description

Cable Loss IDU

SA

Card Fail

SA

Equipment Mismatch

SA

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

E1 RDI egressing (Rx


side) (note 1)
E1 RDI ingressing (Tx
side) (note 1)

ED

WTD

01

It.01

1+1
SAac
(note 3)
SAac
(note 2)
SAac
(note 2)

SA
SA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

High BER

SA

SAac
(note 3)

SA

Housekeeping Alarm

NSA

NSA

NSA

Lan Failure

NSA

NSA

NSA

Battery Failure (note 6)

SA

NSA

SA

Link Identifier Mismatch

SA

SA

SA

SA

SA

SA

SA

SA

SA

SA

SAac
(note 3)

SAac
(note 3)

SA

SA

SA

NSA

NSA

NSA

Loss of Frame of PDH


tributary ingressing (Tx
side) (note 1)
Loss of Frame of PDH
tributary egressing (Rx
side) (note 1)
Loss of Frame of PDH
signal Radio side
Loss of Signal of PDH
tributary
Loss of 64kbit/s G.703
Auxiliary Signal

NTIAL

1+0

1+1w/o
EPS
MUX
protec.
SAac
(note 3)

NSA
NSA
NSA
Loss of 64kbit/s G.703
NMS Signal
(DTE and Asynchronous COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL
3DB161760000DSZZA

189/202

Equipment
Type

Equipment
Expected

Alarm
Description

1+0

1+1

1+1w/o
EPS
MUX
protec.

mode only)
Loss of 64kbit/s V.11
Auxiliary Signal
Loss of 64kbit/s V.11
NMS Signal
(codirectional mode
only)
PDH-AIS egressing (Rx
side)
PDH-AIS ingressing (Tx
side)

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

SA

SA

SA

SA

SA

SA

PPP IP Fail

NSA

NSA

NSA

TCA on Hop Section

SA

SAac
(note 3)

SAac
(note 3)

TCA on Link Section


(note 3)

SA

SA

UAT on Hop Section

SA

SAac
(note 3)

SAac
(note 3)

SA

SA

NSA

NSA

NSA

UAT on Link Section


(note 3)
Firmware Download in
progress

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Service Affecting Evaluation

Service Affecting Evaluation


Equipmen
t Expected

Extension Unit 48/60 E4860-32


V Range Supply
Extension Unit 24/60 E2460-32
V Range Supply

Alarm
Description

Cable Loss IDU

Card Fail

Card Missing

Equipment Mismatch

E1 RDI egressing (Rx


side) (note 1)
E1 RDI ingressing (Tx
side) (note 1)

ED
WTD

01

It.01

1+0

1+1
SAac
(note
SAac
(note
SAac
(note
SAac
(note

3)
2)
2)
2)

1+1w/o
EPS
MUX
protec.
SAac
(note 3)
SAac
SAac
SAac

NSA

NSA

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

190/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Equipment
Type

Service Affecting Evaluation


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Equipment
Type

Equipmen
t Expected

High BER

SAac
(note 3)

1+1w/o
EPS
MUX
protec.
SA
(note 3)

Link Identifier Mismatch

SA

SA

Loss of Alignment

NSA

NSA

SA

SA

SA

SA

SAac
(note 3)

SAac
(note 3)

SA

SA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

SA

SA

SA

SA

TCA on Hop Section

SAac
(note 3)

SAac
(note 3)

TCA on Link Section

SA

SA

UAT on Hop Section

SAac
(note 3)

SAac
(note 3)

UAT on Link Section

SA

SA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

Card Fail

SA

SA

SA

Card Missing

SA

SA

SA

Equipment Mismatch

SA

SAac
(note 2)

SA

Loss of Signal on
Ethernet port (link down)

SA

SA

SA

Loss of data frame

SA

SA

SA

Alarm
Description

1+0

Loss of Frame of PDH


tributary ingressing (Tx
side) (note 1)
Loss of Frame of PDH
tributary egressing (Rx
side) (note 1)
Loss of Frame of PDH
signal Radio side
Loss of Signal of PDH
tributary
Loss of 64kbit/s G.703
Auxiliary Signal
Loss of 64kbit/s G.703
NMS Signal
(DTE and Asynchronous
mode only)
PDH-AIS egressing (Rx
side)
PDH-AIS ingressing (Tx
side)

Unconfigured
Equipment
(note 4)
Firmware Download in
progress

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Gigabit Ethernet unit

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

P4DATASW

1+1

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

191/202

Equipment
Type

Equipmen
t Expected

Alarm
Description

1+0

1+1

1+1w/o
EPS
MUX
protec.

synchronization (Rx side)

16xE1/DS1 plug-in unit

P16E1DS1

Unconfigured
Equipment
(note 5)

NSA

Card Fail

SA

Card Missing

SA

Equipment Mismatch

SA

Loss of Signal of PDH


tributary
Unconfigured
Equipment
(note 5)
Audio
channels
+ P-AC-SC
Service Channel plug-in
unit

NSA
SAac
(note 2)
SAac
(note 2)
SAac
(note 2)

NSA
SA
SA
SA

SA

SA

SA

NSA

NSA

NSA

Card Fail

NSA

NSA

NSA

Card Missing

NSA

NSA

NSA

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Service Affecting Evaluation

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

192/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Unconfigured
Equipment
NSA
NSA
NSA
(note 5)
(note 1)
Only in case of framed tributaries.
(note 2)
The active channel must be referred to the EPS protection.
(note 3)
The active channel must be referred to the RPS protection.
(note 4)
This alarm is detected on Extension Unit, but reported on IDU Main Shelf.
(note 5)
This alarm is detected on plug-in unit, but reported on Main or Extension Unit
(according to the Unit on which the module is plugged).
(note 6)
In 1+1 configurations, the two battery are in protections between them: in normal
condition, one battery supplies one channel, when one of the two is fail, the other one supplies also
the channel which has the battery failure.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

ODU Alarms

Equipment Equipment
Type
Expected

ODU ETSI

ODU-E

Service Affecting
Evaluation
1+1
w/o
1+1 1+1
1+0
MUX
FD
HSB
EPS
prot.

Alarm
Description

ATPC Loop

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

Card Fail

SA

SAac

SAac

SAac

Demodulation Function Failure


(note 4)

SA

SAac

SAac

SAac

Early Warning (note 8)

NSA

NSA

NSA

Equipment Mismatch

SA

SAac

SAac

SAac

Loss of Signal for the Modulation


Function (note 2)

SA

NSA

SAac

SAac

Modulation Function Failure (note 7)

SA

NSA

SAac

SAac

ODU not responding (note 1)

SA

SAac

SAac

SAac

SA

SAac

SAac

SAac

SA

SAac

SAac

SAac

SA

SAac

SAac

SAac

SA

SAac

SAac

SAac

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

Receiving Function Failure (note 3)

SA

SAac

SAac

SAac

Software Version Mismatch

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

Stand-by Software Version Mismatch

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

Transmission Function Failure (note 5)

SA

NSA

SAac

SAac

Unconfigured Equipment (note 6)

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

Firmware Download in progress

NSA

NSA

NSA

NSA

Provisioned Shifter incompatible with


actual HW
Provisioned Frequency incompatible with
actual HW
Provisioned Modulation incompatible
with actual HW
Provisioned Capacity incompatible with
actual HW
Provisioned Tx Power incompatible with
actual HW

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

N.B.: The active channel must be referred to the RPS, except for the transmission alarms in 1+1
HSB configurations (for these alarms the active channel must be referred to TPS).
(note 1)
This alarm represents a communication problem with the ODU (i.e. IDU-ODU cable
failure, ODU missing, ODU power problem).
(note 2)
Loss of Signal for the Modulation Function represents the missing of data at the cable
input of the ODU.
(note 3)
Receiving Function Failure represents the received power alarm.
ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

193/202

Demodulation Function Failure represents the synchronization missing at receive side


Transmission Function Failure represents the transmitted power alarm.
Only for ODU Ch#0 in 1+1 configurations.
Modulation Function Failure represents the synchronization missing at transmission
Only in the 1+1 configurations with Hitless Switch.

15.2 Alarms Reported


The following tables provide the list of all the alarm types supported in this release with the notification
type used to report the alarm and the object that identify the resource generating the alarm itself.
Items to point out:

No transmission alarm is reported on ifTable, the related alarms are reported on the associated
extension tables (see section 4).

The Equipment Label field defined in the Equipment Alarms tables (IDU and ODU are omitted
in these tables for abbreviation purpose) for each slot and sub-slot, has to be used as specific
problem field of each notification (tsdimAlarmSpecProblem) sent on entries of the
opticsIMEquipmentTable.

Concerning the Threshold Cross Alarm (TCA), the indication of which counter has crossed the
threshold has to be provided in the specificProblem parameter of the related alarm trap, using
the OID of the counter.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

(note 4)
alarm.
(note 5)
(note 6)
(note 7)
side alarm.
(note 8)

Prefixes opticsIM/tsdim and opticsIMAlarm are omitted in the Notification Type and Table/Scalar
columns.
The Notification Type column refers to both raise and clear alarms traps.

15.2.1 Equipment Alarms


Notification Type
(Mib)

Remote NE Failure RemoteNEFailure


Indication
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
Housekeeping Alarm
HousekeepingAlarm
(opticsIMEqptMib)
Card Fail
ReplaceUnitProblem
(opticsIMEqptMib)

ED
WTD

01

It.01

Objects
Index
Value
1.1.0.0

Table/Scalar
Equipment
(Mib)
Label
EquipmentTable
(opticsIMEqptMib)
ExternalInputPoint 1..6
(opticsIMEqptMib)
EquipmentTable
1.1.1.0 MAIN Ch#1
(opticsIMEqptMib) 1.1.1.1 MAIN/<(note 1)>
Ch#1
1.1.1.2 MAIN/<note
2>
Ch#1
1.2.0.0 ODU Ch#1
1.3.1.0 EXT Ch#0
1.3.1.1 EXT/<(note 1)>

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

194/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Alarm
Description

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Alarm
Description

Notification Type
(Mib)

Card Missing

ReplaceUnitMissing
(opticsIMEqptMib)

Equipment Mismatch

ReplaceUnitTypeMismatch
(opticsIMEqptMib)

Lan Failure

Table/Scalar
(Mib)

LanFailure
(opticsIMEqptMib)
Battery Failure
BatteryFailure
(opticsIMEqptMib)
ODU not responding
InternalCommunicationPr EquipmentTable
oblem
(opticsIMEqptMib)
(opticsIMEqptMib)
Software
Version VersionMismatch
Mismatch
(opticsIMEqptMib)
Stand-by
Software StandByVersionMismatch
Version Mismatch
(opticsIMEqptMib)
Unconfigured
UnconfiguredEquipmentPr
Equipment
esent
(opticsIMEqptMib)

Firmware Download in FirmwareDownloadOnGo


progress
ing
(opticsIMEqptMib)

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

(note 1)

ED

WTD

1.1.1.0 MAIN Ch#1


1.2.0.0 ODU Ch#1
1.4.0.0 ODU Ch#0
1.2.0.0
1.4.0.0
1.2.0.0
1.4.0.0
1.1.1.0

ODU Ch#1
ODU Ch#0
ODU Ch#1
ODU Ch#0
MAIN/Plug-in
Ch#1

1.1.0.0 EXT Ch#0


1.3.1.0 EXT/Plug-in
Ch#0
1.4.0.0 ODU Ch#0
1.1.1.0 MAIN Ch#1
1.1.1.1 MAIN/DATA
1.2.0.0 ODU Ch#1
1.3.1.0 EXT Ch#0
1.4.0.0 ODU Ch#0

The label is one of the following:


empty, when no plug-in is configured
E1, when the 16xE1/DS1 plug-in is provisioned and it configured to work in E1 mode
DATA, when the 4xDATA (Gigabit Eth.) plug-in is provisioned.

(note 2)
NTIAL

Objects
Index
Equipment
Value
Label
Ch#0
1.4.0.0 ODU Ch#0
1.1.1.1 MAIN/<(note 1)>
Ch#1
1.1.1.2 MAIN/<note
2>
Ch#1
1.3.1.0 EXT Ch#0
1.3.1.1 EXT/<(note 1)>
Ch#0
1.1.1.0 MAIN Ch#1
1.1.1.1 MAIN/<(note 1)>
Ch#1
1.2.0.0 ODU Ch#1
1.3.1.0 EXT Ch#0
1.3.1.1 EXT/<(note 1)>
Ch#0
1.4.0.0 ODU Ch#0
1.1.1.0 MAIN Ch#1

01

The label is one of the following:


It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

195/202

15.2.2 Communication Alarms


Alarm
Description

Notification Type
(Mib)

Loss of 64 kbit/s G.703 LossOfSignal


(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
Auxiliary Signal
Loss of 64 kbit/s V.11
Auxiliary Signal
Cable Loss IDU
CableLOS
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
High BER
HighBER
(opticsIMRadioTrsCommonMib
)
Loss of Frame of PDH LossOfFrame
signal Radio side
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
E1 RDI ingressing (Tx side) RemoteDefectIndication
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)

E1 RDI egressing (Rx side)

Loss of Frame of PDH


tributary ingressing (Tx
side)
Loss of Signal of PDH
tributary
PDH-AIS ingressing
(Tx side)
Loss of Frame of PDH
tributary egressing (Rx side)
PDH-AIS egressing
(Rx side)

LossOfFrame
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)

Link Identifier Mismatch

LinkIdentifierMismatch
(opticsIMTrsCommonMib)

Loss
of
data
frame
synchronization (Rx side)
Loss of Signal on Ethernet
port (link down)

LossOfFrame
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
LossOfSignal
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)

ED
WTD

01

It.01

LossOfSignal
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
opticsIMAlarmAis
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
LossOfFrame
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
opticsIMAlarmAis
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)

Objects
Table/Scalar
(Mib)
AuxiliaryPITTPBidTable
(opticsIMOverheadMib)

Index
Value
301

CoderTTPTable
(opticsIMTrsPdhMib)

20101
20100

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

empty, when no plug-in is configured


AC-SC, when the audio channels+ Service Channel plug-in is provisioned.

E1pPITTPTable
1xx01 or
(opticsIMTrsCommonMib) 1xx99
(xx=1..3
2)
(note 1)
E1PathTTPTable
2xx01 or
(opticsIMTrsCommonMib) 2xx99
(xx=1..3
2)
(note 2)
E1pPITTPTable
1xx01 or
(opticsIMTrsCommonMib) 1xx99
(xx=1..3
2)
(note 1)

E1PathTPTable
2xx01 or
(opticsIMTrsCommonMib) 2xx99
(xx=1..3
2)
(note 2)
FrameTTPTable
20101 or
(opticsIMTrsPdhMib)
20199
(note 2)
EthConfTable
29901
(opticsIMEthNEMib)
ifMauTable
11701;1
(mauMod)
11801;1

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

196/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

TCA on Hop Section

TCA
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
UAT on Hop Section
UnavailableTime
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
TCA on Link Section
TCA
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
UAT on Link Section
UnavailableTime
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
Loss of 64kbit/s G.703 LossOfSignal
NMS Signal (DTE and (tsdimSnmpNEMib)
Asynchronous mode only)
Loss of 64kbit/s V.11 NMS
Signal (codirectional only)
PPP IP Fail
PPPFail
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
ATPC Loop
Early Warning

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Provisioned Frequency (or


shifter value) incompatible
with actual HW
Provisioned shifter value
incompatible with actual
HW
Provisioned
modulation
value incompatible with
actual HW
Provisioned capacity value
incompatible with actual
HW
Provisioned
Tx
Power
incompatible with actual
HW
Receiving Function Failure
Transmission
Function
Failure
Demodulation
Function
Failure
Loss of Signal for the
Modulation Function
Modulation
Function
Failure
Loss of Alignment

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

Objects
PdhFrameHopCurrentDat
aTable
(opticsIMPdhPmMib)
PdhFrameLinkCurrentDat
aTable
(opticsIMPdhPmMib)
PointToPointIPTable
(opticsIMCommRouMib)

20101; 1
20101; 2
20100; 1
20100; 2
20199; 1
20199; 2

1
2
3
AtpcLoopProblem
RadioPDHTTPBidTable
20101
(opticsIMRadioTrsCommonMib (opticsIMRadioTrsPdhMib) 20100
)
EarlyWarning
(opticsIMRadioTrsCommonMib
)
IncompatibleFrequency
(opticsIMRadioTrsCommonMib
)
RxDivFail
(opticsIMRadioTrsCommonMib
)
DemDivLOS
(opticsIMRadioTrsCommonMib)

VcoExternalLOS
(opticsIMRadioTrsCommonMib)

IncompatiblePTX
(opticsIMRadioTrsCommonMib
)
RxFail
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
TxFail
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
DemFail
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
ModLOS
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
ModFail
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)
LossOfAlignment
(tsdimSnmpNEMib)

RadioPDHTTPBidTable
20101
(opticsIMRadioTrsPdhMib) 20100

RxStaticDelayTable
(opticsIMRadioSwtcMib)

1; 99

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

197/202

(note 2)
20101 in case of 1+0 configurations and 1+1 configuration without MUX EPS
protection, 20199 in case of 1+1 configurations.

15.3 Predefined ASAPs Severity


The following tables provide the content of the four predefined ASAPs. As the notification types
(probable causes) included in the predefined ASAPs are configuration dependent, the Config.
column defines the configurations in which the probable cause must be included.
If no indication is provided means that the probable cause must be included in all the configurations.
The severity defined in the following tables concerns the 1+1 configurations (when needed, the
severity for SA and NSA is different).
As general rule, the severity for 1+0 configurations is obtained using the SA severity also for the NSA
one (if they are different). The only exception is the LossOfSignal probable cause; infact, in this case,
different severity must be used for LOS of the PDH tributaries (SA) and of the auxiliary and NMS
signals (NSA).

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

(note 1)
1xx01 in case of 1+0 configurations and 1+1 configuration without MUX EPS
protection, 1xx99 in case of 1+1 configurations.

ASAP#1 (No Alarm) is not reported in these tables: the severity of all the notification types (probable
causes) is always NAL independently from the service dependency (SA and NSA).
The sum of alarms with CRITICAL or MAJOR severity is reported on LED MAJ on the front panel.
The sum of alarms with MINOR severity is reported on LED MIN on the front panel.
The alarms with WARNING severity are not reported on any LED on the front panel.

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

198/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

Legenda:
ETH: only in Ethernet configurations (1+0, 1+1)
1+1: only in 1+1 configurations
NAL: Non ALarm
MAJ: MAJor
MIN: MINor
WAR: WARning

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Equipment Alarms

Notification Type

Primary
Alarms
ASAP#2
SA

NSA

No Remote
Alarms
ASAP#3
SA

NSA

All
Alarms
ASAP#4
SA

NSA

HousekeepingAlarm

WAR

WAR

MIN

MIN

MAJ

MAJ

InternalCommunicationProble
m

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

LanFailure

MIN

MIN

WAR

WAR

MIN

MIN

BatteryFailure

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

RemoteNEFailure

NAL

NAL

NAL

NAL

WAR

WAR

ReplaceableUnitMissing

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

ReplaceableUnitProblem

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

ReplaceableUnitTypeMismatc
h

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

StandByVersionMismatch

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

UnconfiguredEquipmentPrese
nt

WAR

WAR

WAR

WAR

WAR

WAR

VersionMismatch

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

FirmwareDownloadOnGoing

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

199/202

Notification
Type

Config.

Primary
Alarms
ASAP#2
SA

NSA

No Remote
Alarms
ASAP#3
SA

NSA

All
Alarms
ASAP#4
SA

NSA

Ais

NAL

NAL

NAL

NAL

MAJ

MIN

AtpcLoopProblem

MIN

MIN

WAR

WAR

MIN

MIN

CableLOS

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

DemFail

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

EarlyWarning

NAL

NAL

WAR

WAR

WAR

WAR

HighBER

MIN

WAR

MIN

WAR

MIN

WAR

IncompatibleFrequency

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

IncompatiblePTX

WAR

WAR

WAR

WAR

WAR

WAR

LinkIdentifierMismatch

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

LossOfFrame

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

LossOfSignal

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

ModLOS

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

PPPFail

MIN

WAR

MIN

WAR

MIN

WAR

RemoteDefectIndication

NAL

NAL

NAL

NAL

WAR

WAR

RxFail

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

ThresholdCross

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

TxFail

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

UnavailableTime

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

ModFail

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

MAJ

MIN

IncompatibleShifter
(RxDivFail) (note 1)
IncompatibleModulation
(DemDivLOS) (note 2)
IncompatibleCapacity
(VcoExternalLOS) (note 3)

LossOfAlignment

1+1

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

Communication Alarms

ED
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

200/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

(note 1)
RxDivFail is the correct notification type, but the sw realizes a translation and then to
CT, the label IncompatibleShifter is shown.

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

(note 2)
DemDivLOS is the correct notification type, but the sw realizes a translation and then to
CT, the label IncompatibleModulation is shown.
(note 3)
VcoExternalLOS is the correct notification type, but the sw realizes a translation and
then to CT, the label IncompatibleCapacity is shown.

ED

NTIAL
WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

201/202

ED

WTD

01

It.01

COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL

3DB161760000DSZZA

202/202

1AA 00014 0004 (9711) A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents, not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel

END OF DOCUMENT

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen